JP2021006303A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To allow a main control part to execute various functions in which control by the main control part, such as AT, is preferable by reducing the amount of processing and the amount of data in the main control part.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a reporting device for reporting validity or invalidity of stop operation of variation display of a pattern by a player, and reporting control means for receiving a command and controlling a reporting mode by the reporting device on the basis of the received command. The reporting control means changes a reporting mode by the reporting device to a first reporting mode for showing that stop operation is valid when receiving a first command to be transmitted when the stop operation becomes valid, and changes the reporting mode to a second reporting mode for showing that stop operation is invalid when receiving a second command to be transmitted when the stop operation is performed and the stop operation becomes invalid. The reporting control means changes the reporting mode to the second reporting mode when a player starts operating under a condition of the first reporting mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 116

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned. In the following, the roles related to the payout of game media (medals, etc.) (internal winning role, display role) will be referred to as "small roles", and the roles related to replay will be referred to as "replay roles", and will be related to the operation of the bonus game. The role is called a "bonus role".

Further, conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above configuration, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") has been developed. Further, in addition to the conventional AT function, a function in which a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than the normal time is activated when a specific symbol combination is displayed, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") is provided. A game machine to be equipped is also being developed.

Further, the above-mentioned gaming machine generally includes, for example, a main control unit that controls reel operation control processing, internal lottery processing, and the like, and, for example, a sub-control unit that controls the above-mentioned AT. Conventionally, there is known a game machine that performs AT lottery in the sub-control unit based on a command transmitted from the main control unit to the sub-control unit (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In a gaming machine having such a configuration, the processing load of the control unit can be distributed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-254920

As described above, conventionally, there is known a game machine in which an auxiliary control unit performs an AT lottery based on a received command. However, since the AT is a function that affects the ball ejection performance of the game machine, it has been required to be controlled by the main control unit.

Normally, a game machine is inspected to see if it is appropriate to install the game machine in the game hall, but the capacity of the main control unit is adjusted for the convenience of efficiency of this inspection. , There were certain restrictions. Therefore, due to the limitation of the capacity of the main control unit, various functions that are preferably controlled by the main control unit such as the AT described above have been mounted on the peripheral board such as the sub control unit.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to reduce the amount of processing and the amount of data in the main control unit, and to provide various functions in which control by a main control unit such as an AT is preferable. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be executed by the main control unit.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

A start operation detecting means (for example, a start switch 16S described later) for detecting a start operation by a player, and
A variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three reels, which will be described later), which are composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely display a symbol required for the game based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Stepping motor 61L.61C, 61R) and
A notification device (for example, a lighting lamp of the stop button described later) that notifies the player whether or not the stop operation of the variation display of the symbol is valid or invalid, and
A transmission means for transmitting a command (for example, a main control circuit unit 41 described later) and
Notification control means that receives a command transmitted from the transmission means and controls the notification mode by the notification device based on the received command (for example, processing at the time of receiving a constant speed start command and processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command described later). ) And,
When the notification control means receives a first command (for example, a constant speed start command described later) transmitted when the stop operation becomes effective, the stop operation is effective in the notification mode by the notification device. Change to the first notification mode (for example, blue lighting (effective lighting mode)) to indicate that.
When the notification control means receives a second command (for example, a reel stop command described later) transmitted when the stop operation is performed and the stop operation becomes invalid, the stop operation performs the notification mode. Change to the second notification mode (for example, red lighting (invalid lighting mode)) indicating that it is invalid.
The notification control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, under the conditions of the first notification mode, when there is the start operation by the player, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three stepping motors 61L.61C, 61R, which will be described later), which is composed of a plurality of display columns and displays a symbol required for the game in a variable manner.
A stop operation detection means (for example, a stop switch 17S described later) that detects a stop operation by the player, and
A notification device (for example, a stop button lighting lamp described later) provided corresponding to the stop operation detection means, and
Data transmission means (for example, main control circuit unit 41 described later) for transmitting data (various commands described later) related to the operation during the game, and
A notification control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42 described later) that receives data transmitted from the data transmission means and controls a notification mode by the notification device based on the received data is provided.
Data indicating that the notification control means has reached a predetermined speed (for example, a pseudo constant speed described later) in the variable display of the display column during the lock period in which the game operation by the player is invalidated. For example, when the effect instruction command described later is received, the notification control means has the first notification mode indicating that the stop operation during the lock period is effective in the notification mode by the notification device. Control to be
When the notification control means receives data (for example, an effect instruction command described later) indicating that a stop operation (for example, a pseudo pressing described later) has been performed during the lock period, the notification control means Controls the notification mode by the notification device so that it becomes the second notification mode indicating that the stop operation during the lock period is invalid.
During the lock period, the stop operation during the lock period is in a valid state, and the notification control means corresponds to a predetermined operation other than the stop operation (for example, an operation for a start lever described later). When the data is received, the notification control means controls the notification mode by the notification device so as to be the second notification mode.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the amount of processing and the amount of data in the main control unit can be reduced, and various functions preferably controlled by the main control unit such as AT can be executed in the main control unit. be able to.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT game state of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the production game state of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game operation in a unit game and the transition timing of a production game state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation flow of the pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect executed in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel automatic stop pattern of the pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect executed in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel automatic stop pattern of the pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect executed in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel automatic stop pattern of the pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect executed in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel automatic stop pattern of the pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect executed in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel automatic stop pattern of the pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect executed in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows various stop positions of the reel of the pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect executed in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of generating the rotation start sound at the time of a long weight effect executed in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus operation time table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for a BB game state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol correspondence winning operation flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery table (mode 0-3: setting 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo bonus lottery table (mode 4-7: setting 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of the present game pseudo RB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock lottery table (mode 4-7: at the time of the present game pseudo RB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of the present game pseudo BB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock lottery table (mode 4-7: at the time of the present game pseudo BB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of the next game pseudo RB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock lottery table (mode 4-7: at the time of the next game pseudo RB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock lottery table (mode 0-3: at the time of the next game pseudo BB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock lottery table (mode 4-7: at the time of the next game pseudo BB win) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode transition lottery table (mode 0-3: pseudo RB, setting 1) at the start of pseudo-bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode transition lottery table (mode 4-7: pseudo RB, setting 1) at the start of pseudo bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode transition lottery table (mode 0-3: pseudo BB, setting 1) at the start of a pseudo bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode transition lottery table (mode 4-7: pseudo BB, setting 1) at the start of pseudo bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus middle mode transition lottery table (modes 0-3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus middle mode transition lottery table (modes 4-7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode transition lottery table at the time of setting change in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the next pseudo bonus transition game number lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence table of the next pseudo bonus transition game number and a random number value in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB stock lottery table at the start of a pseudo bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB stock lottery table in pseudo bonus in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table (at the time of pseudo-RB start) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table (at the time of pseudo BB start) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table (at the time of pseudo BB + freeze A start) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table (at the time of pseudo BB + freeze B start) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight lottery table at the start of a pseudo bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight generation game lottery table (without 1G series in pseudo RB) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight generation game lottery table (without 1G series in pseudo BB) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight generation game lottery table (there is 1G series in pseudo RB) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight generation game lottery table (there is 1G series in pseudo BB) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the long weight lottery table in pseudo-bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area (internal winning combination storage area, carryover combination storage area) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect game state storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery state storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence between the main winning combination name and the sub winning combination name in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the sub-effect flag used in the effect control in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the schematic structure of the command data transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub-control circuit in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the effect instruction command data transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub-control circuit in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart (power-on processing) which shows the processing example of the main control circuit of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the initialization process at the time of power-on in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the power failure recovery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery processing at the time of lever-on in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ordinary lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the mode transition lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the stock lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the stock lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel effect lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel rotation start processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel production run-time processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel lock processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel automatic stop processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pseudo-bonus display time processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pseudo-bonus initialization processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority pull-in control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 3rd stop post-production processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal payout processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus end check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving the medal insertion command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving a constant speed start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the settlement sound command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving a credit information command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving an effect instruction command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the set processing of the effect data at the time of starting a reel effect in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the non-operation command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be taken as an example of a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine having an AT function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and those related to other so-called "losses". Provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) in the specified period of 190 msec is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means can combine the symbols as much as possible along the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the reel rotation as shown. In addition, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line. Let me.

As described above, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of the displayed symbols is related to the winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, various methods are used, such as video display performed by a display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by various speakers, or a combination thereof. Production is performed.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for production is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is a game. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. The pachislot machine of the present embodiment is functionally mainly composed of a main control unit that controls various movements related to the progress of the game and the various movements, a sub-control unit that directs the game, and a main control. It is composed of a game machine housing unit for mounting a unit and a sub-control unit. The main control unit includes a main control circuit (main board) described later and various peripheral devices (various operation buttons, reel units, etc.) connected to the main control circuit (main board). Further, the sub-control unit includes a sub-control circuit (sub-board) described later and various peripheral devices (including various effect devices such as a display device, a speaker, a lamp group, and a reel backlight) controlled by the sub-control circuit (sub-board). In the following, the contents of each component will be described more specifically.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet 2a. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that the carrier can handle when transporting the pachi-slot machine 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel (display row) has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols (identification information) are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction. Further, although not shown, the reel body is provided with a backlight (so-called reel backlight) for irradiating the back surface of the sheet material with light. This reel backlight is turned on and off under the control of a sub-control circuit 42 described later.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a display device 11. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot machine 1.

The display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged in a matrix. Then, the display device 11 performs an effect (notification) by a dot pattern represented by turning on and off a plurality of LEDs. For example, the display device 11 also performs a lighting effect of an image of a specific pattern (notification lamp described later: not shown) for notifying (notifying) the pseudo-bonus winning described later. The display device 11 shows a specific example of the notification means according to the present invention, and the display device 11 may be composed of a liquid crystal display device.

Below the display device 11, a display window unit 4 composed of three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R for displaying the symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, respectively, is provided. Hereinafter, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are referred to as a left display window 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R, respectively.

Each display window shows a specific example of the design display area according to the present invention, and is formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions overlapping the placement areas of the three reels when viewed from the front (player side), and are located in front of the three reels (player side). It is provided as follows. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, respectively, through the three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

In the present embodiment, when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display window is stopped, three of the plurality of types of symbols drawn on the reel are arranged in succession (a predetermined number). ) Is set to a size that can be displayed. That is, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are provided in the frame of each display window, and one symbol is displayed in each symbol display area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reel design can be displayed in a 3 × 3 arrangement form on the display window portion 4 composed of the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

Then, in the present embodiment, in the symbol displayed in the 3 × 3 arrangement form, whether or not the pseudo line (virtual line) set from the left display window 4L to the right display window 4R is won or not. It is defined as a line for making a judgment (hereinafter referred to as "effective line"). In the present embodiment, a virtual line (hereinafter, referred to as “cross-down line”) connecting the upper region of the left display window 4L, the middle region of the middle display window 4C, and the lower region of the right display window 4R is used as an effective line. ..

In the following, the virtual line connecting the middle area of the left display window 4L, the middle area of the middle display window 4C, and the middle area of the right display window 4R will be referred to as a "center line", and the upper area and middle display of the left display window 4L will be referred to. The virtual line connecting the upper area of the window 4C and the upper area of the right display window 4R is called a "top line", and connects the lower area of the left display window 4L, the lower area of the middle display window 4C, and the lower area of the right display window 4R. The virtual line is referred to as a "bottom line", and the virtual line connecting the lower region of the left display window 4L, the middle region of the middle display window 4C, and the upper region of the right display window 4R is referred to as a "cross-up line".

The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is composed of a frame-shaped member having an opening for exposing the display device 11.

A lamp group 21 composed of a plurality of LEDs or the like is provided on the upper frame portion, the lower frame portion, and the both side frame portions of the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect. For example, information (for example, the number of the pressing order) indicating the pressing order of the stop buttons (reel stopping order) is displayed in a part of the lower frame portion. That is, in the lower frame portion of the front panel 10, push order navigation is performed. The lighting operation of the lamp group 21 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

A pedestal portion 12 is provided at substantially the center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1BET button 15, start lever 16, and three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) to be operated by the player.

The medal slot 13 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 13 are used in one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3). In addition, the amount exceeding the preset number of sheets can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (so-called credit function). This credit function shows a specific example of the game medium storage means according to the present invention.

The MAX bet button 14 and the 1BET button 15 are provided to determine the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to be used for one game. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 composed of a 7-segment LED. The 7-segment display 6 has the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as "the number of payouts") and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as "the number of credits"). , Information such as the number of medals inserted for playing a game (hereinafter referred to as "BET number") is digitally displayed.

Further, although not shown, the pedestal portion 12 is pushed to display information on the type of the push order flag stored in the push order flag storage area, which will be described later, that is, the type of the reel stop order notified at the time of AT operation. A forward instruction display unit is provided. The push order instruction display unit shows a specific example of the notification means according to the present invention.

The push order instruction display unit can be configured by, for example, a display device including a plurality of lamps, LEDs, and the like. The display mode of the information regarding the push order flag by the push order instruction display unit can be configured in any mode as long as the type of the push order flag can be identified. For example, the push order instruction display unit may be composed of a plurality of lamps, and the on / off pattern of the plurality of lamps may be associated with the type of the push order flag to notify the information regarding the type of the reel stop order. Further, for example, the push order instruction display unit may display information (for example, a stop order number) that directly indicates the reel stop order.

Further, the display operation of the push order instruction display unit is controlled by the main control circuit 41. When the AT is operating, the information regarding the type of reel stop order notified by the push order instruction display unit is the press order of the stop button notified by the lamp group 21 provided in the lower frame portion of the front panel 10. There is a one-to-one correspondence with the information shown.

In the present embodiment, the display area (area) of the information regarding the reel stop order in the push order instruction display unit is smaller than the area (area) in which the lamp group 21 notifies the push order, and the pedestal portion. The installation surface of the push order instruction display unit in No. 12 is not formed on the same surface as the display window unit 4 for visually recognizing the reel. Therefore, the player can play the game without being aware of (visually) the push order instruction display unit.

Further, if the push order instruction display unit displays information on the reel stop order and the lamp group 21 notifies the push order, the player may perform the pseudo bonus winning notification effect (the notification lamp lighting effect) described later. However, it will be recognized before the announcement that the pseudo bonus has been won. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the interest of the game, the timing of displaying the information on the reel stop order by the push order instruction display unit and notifying the push order by the lamp group 21 is set after the notification effect of the pseudo bonus winning described later is completed. Is preferable. Further, since it is generally considered that the navigation is started when the pseudo bonus is started, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus (“BIG alignment” described later or “BIG alignment” described later) is used in the pseudo bonus start reel effect described later. After the "REG alignment") is automatically stopped (pseudo-stop), it is preferable that the push order instruction display unit displays information on the reel stop order and the lamp group 21 notifies the push order. For example, the push order instruction display unit displays information on the reel stop order and the lamp group 21 presses the reels, triggered by the generation process of the effect instruction command described later (S244, S250, etc. in FIG. 97 described later) and the transmission process. It may be configured so that the order notification is executed.

A medal payout outlet 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 18 guides the medal discharged by driving the medal payout device 33 (see FIGS. 3 and 4) described later to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 18. In addition, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the content of the production. The speakers 20L and 20R show a specific example of the audio output means, the fluctuation start effect execution means, the payout effect execution means, or the settlement time effect execution means according to the present invention.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1.

The cabinet 2a is composed of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member (box-shaped member) having one surface open on the front side. A main board 31 on which a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 4 described later) described later is mounted is provided on the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

Three reels (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R) are provided in the central portion of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor described later (one of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 4 described later) via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Will be done.

A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as "hopper 33") having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one is provided in the lower portion of the cabinet 2a. Further, in the cabinet 2a, one side portion (left side in the example shown in FIG. 3) of the hopper 33 is provided with a power supply device 34 that supplies necessary power to each device included in the pachi-slot machine 1. The hopper 33 shows a specific example of the game medium payout means according to the present invention.

A sub-board 32 on which a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 4 and 5 described later) described later is mounted is provided on the upper portion of the back surface (a portion opposite to the display screen side) of the front door 2b. The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect using the display device 11, the speakers 20L and 20R, the lamp group 21, a reel backlight (not shown), and the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 42 will be described later.

Further, a selector 35 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device that selects whether or not the material, shape, and the like of medals inserted from the outside are appropriate via the medal insertion slot 13 (see FIG. 2), and the hopper 33 determines that the medals are appropriate. I will guide you to. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 4 described later) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

<Circuit configuration of pachislot>
Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. 5 is a block configuration diagram showing an internal configuration of the sub-control circuit.

The pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub control circuit 42, and a peripheral device (actuator) electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. It is equipped with 66.

The microcomputer 50 is composed of a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

The main ROM 52 stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, data tables such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 51 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. Further, the random number generator 56 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

Various switches, sensors, and the like are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and the like to control the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R.

The stop switch 17S shows a specific example of the stop operation detecting means according to the present invention, in which each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation). ) Is detected. The start switch 16S shows a specific example of the start operation detecting means according to the present invention, and detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The checkout switch 14S detects that the checkout button has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 14S shows a specific example of the settlement operation detecting means according to the present invention.

The medal sensor 35S shows a specific example of the insertion operation detecting means according to the present invention, and detects that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 13 has passed through the selector 35. Further, the bet switch 12S detects that the bet button (MAX bet button 14 or 1BET button 15) is pressed by the player (BET operation).

Further, as peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, a 7-segment display 6 and a hopper 33. Further, a drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects a reel index indicating that the reel has rotated once for each reel by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output of the pulse and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle based on the number of output of the pulse. Further, the driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle. The three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R show a specific example of the variation display means according to the present invention.

The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor to rotate the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many reels there are symbols). Only rotated).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to "1". "Is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The display unit drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. The payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged to the outside from the hopper 33 has reached a predetermined number of payouts. An external terminal plate 18S is connected to the main control circuit 41, and a hall computer / calling device 100 is connected to the external terminal plate 18S. That is, the main control circuit 41 is connected to the hall computer / calling device 100 via the external terminal plate 18S.

[Sub-control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. .. As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86. Further, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter 92, and an amplifier 93.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, the main board communication task for controlling the communication with the main control circuit 41 and the random value for determining the effect content are extracted and the effect content (effect data). Production registration task for determining and registering, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the display device 11 based on the determined production content, and a lamp control task for controlling the light output by the lamp group 21. , Programs such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by the speakers 20L and 20R are included.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, BGM (background music) and effects. It includes various storage areas such as a storage area for storing sound data related to sound and a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light.

The sub-RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, peripheral devices such as a display device 11, speakers 20L and 20R, and a lamp group 21 are connected to the sub-control circuit 42. That is, the operation of these peripheral devices is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and the created image is displayed by the display device 11. Will be done.

Further, the sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the D / A converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM by the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<RT game state and bonus game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, various RT gaming states and bonus gaming states managed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and transition flows between these gaming states will be described. To do.

In the present embodiment, there are two types of RT game states, an RT0 game state and an RT1 game state, in which the winning probabilities of the internal winning combinations related to the replay are different from each other. Further, in the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as “BB”) is provided as a bonus game, and the main control circuit 41 also manages the game state (BB game state) of the BB game. In addition, "BB" is called a bonus continuous actuating device related to a regular bonus (hereinafter, referred to as "RB"), which is a so-called first type special bonus, and "RB" is continuously actuated.

The RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is, for example, an RT gaming state that is set at the time of shipment or initialization of the pachislot machine 1. In the RT0 game state, the number of medals hung for each unit game (1 game) is 3. That is, in the RT0 game state, a three-card game is performed.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the BB (big bonus) is won (established) in the RT0 gaming state, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state as shown in FIG.

The RT1 game state is a game state in which games in various production game states described later are executed, and the actual game executed by the player is performed in the RT1 game state. In the RT1 game state, a three-card game is played.

Further, in the RT1 game state, the reel stop control is performed so that the winning BB in the RT0 game state does not win a prize. That is, in the RT1 gaming state, the reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combination related to BB is not stopped and displayed on the effective line. Therefore, the game in the RT1 game state is executed in the game state in which the BB is carried over (internal winning state), and the RT1 game state becomes the so-called "BB flag state".

When the BB wins (operates) in the RT1 gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the BB gaming state, as shown in FIG. In the BB game state, a three-card game is played, and the BB ends when the total number of medals paid out exceeds 90. Then, when the BB ends, as shown in FIG. 6, the gaming state shifts from the BB gaming state to the RT0 gaming state.

<Various production game states>
[Transition flow between various production game states]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, an outline of various production game states managed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment and a transition flow between various production game states will be described.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has an AT function. Then, whether or not the AT function is activated is determined by lottery by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51). Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also manages the activated / non-activated state of the AT function (AT game period). That is, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) manages the state of the game in which the AT function is activated and the state of the game in which the AT function is not activated in terms of the effect of the game.

In the following, the privilege of operating the AT function will be referred to as a "pseudo-bonus", and the non-operating game of the AT function will be referred to as a "normal game". Further, the state in which the AT function is activated is referred to as a "pseudo-bonus state", the state in which the AT function is not activated is referred to as a "normal gaming state", and these states are collectively referred to as a "directed gaming state".

Further, in the present embodiment, as a pseudo bonus, a pseudo bonus (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo BB") in which the operating period of the AT function (AT game period) is 70 games, and an operating period of the AT function of 20 games. Two types of pseudo-bonus of a certain pseudo-bonus (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-RB") are provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the pseudo-bonus state (notification game state), the pseudo-bonus state in which the pseudo-BB is performed (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-BB state") and the pseudo-bonus state in which the pseudo-RB is performed (hereinafter, "pseudo-BB state") "Pseudo RB state") is provided. Hereinafter, the game content performed in each of the above-mentioned production game states and the transition between the various production game states will be described.

In a normal game, a pseudo bonus lottery is performed for each unit game. Then, when the pseudo BB wins by the pseudo bonus lottery and the specific symbol combination (“BIG alignment” described later) related to the pseudo BB is automatically stopped on the predetermined virtual line by the pseudo bonus start rotation effect described later (FIG. 7). Then, it is described as “pseudo BB winning”), and as shown in FIG. 7, the effect game state shifts from the normal game state to the pseudo BB state (first AT state). At this time, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, the effect game state is changed from the normal game state to the notification waiting state and the matching waiting state described later, or the pseudo bonus state via the matching waiting state. Transition (transition forms 2 and 3 in FIG. 8 described later).

Further, in a normal game, a pseudo RB is won by a pseudo bonus lottery, and a specific symbol combination (“REG alignment” described later) related to the pseudo RB is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line by a pseudo bonus start rotation effect described later. Then (indicated as "pseudo RB winning" in FIG. 7), the effect game state shifts from the normal game state to the pseudo RB state (second AT state). At this time, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, the effect game state is changed from the normal game state to the notification waiting state and the matching waiting state described later, or the pseudo bonus state via the matching waiting state. Transition (transition modes 2 and 3 in FIG. 8 described later).

In the pseudo BB state, an AT game in which one set is 70 games is performed. During the game period in the pseudo BB state (including the start game of the pseudo BB), the stock lottery of the pseudo BB is performed for each unit game (for each game). Then, during the game period in the pseudo BB state, the pseudo BB game of 70 games is completed without winning the stock lottery, and the pseudo bonus is not won in the unit game of the first game immediately after the end of the pseudo BB. In that case, as shown in FIG. 7, the effect game state shifts from the pseudo BB state to the normal game state.

On the other hand, during the pseudo BB game period (including the pseudo BB start game), when the stock lottery is won and the pseudo BB is stocked, the lock period at the start of the game of the next game of the pseudo BB end game of the current set A specific symbol combination related to the pseudo BB (“BIG alignment” described later) is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line by the pseudo bonus start rotation effect described later, and then the game of the pseudo BB is continued. A pseudo BB of a continuation form (hereinafter, also referred to as a "renso" form) called a so-called "1G ream" is started. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a reel lock effect such as a freeze may occur before the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect.

Further, when the pseudo BB continues in 1G series, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, in the period from the third stop of the end game of the pseudo BB of the current set to the start of the normal rotation of the reel of the next game. , The effect game state returns from the pseudo-bonus state to the pseudo-bonus state again via the notification waiting state and the matching waiting state described later (from the transition form 6 in FIG. 8 to the pseudo-bonus notification in the transition form 2 described later). Aspect to shift to the game).

Further, even if the pseudo BB game is completed without winning the stock lottery during the pseudo BB game period, the pseudo bonus (pseudo BB or pseudo BB or pseudo BB or pseudo bonus) is used in the unit game of the first game immediately after the end of the pseudo BB. When the RB) is won and started, as shown in FIG. 7, the game of the pseudo bonus (pseudo BB or pseudo RB) is continued. When the pseudo bonus continues in such a mode, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, from the third stop of the end game of the pseudo BB of the current set to the start of the normal rotation of the reel of the next game. During the period, the effect game state returns from the pseudo-bonus state to the pseudo-bonus state again via the normal game state and the matching waiting state described later (transition from the transition form 5 in FIG. 8 described later to the transition form 3). Aspect).

In the pseudo RB state, an AT game in which one set is 20 games is performed. During the game period in the pseudo RB state (including the start game of the pseudo RB), the stock lottery of the pseudo BB is performed for each unit game (for each game). Then, during the game period in the pseudo RB state, the pseudo RB game of 20 games is completed without winning the stock lottery, and the pseudo bonus is not won in the unit game of the first game immediately after the end of the pseudo RB. In that case, as shown in FIG. 7, the effect game state shifts from the pseudo RB state to the normal game state.

On the other hand, during the pseudo RB game period (including the pseudo RB start game), when the stock lottery is won and the pseudo BB is stocked, the lock period at the start of the game of the next game of the pseudo RB end game of the current set A specific symbol combination related to the pseudo BB (“BIG alignment” described later) is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line by the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect described later, and then the pseudo-bonus game is continued (1G). The pseudo BB of the series is started). Even when the 1G series of pseudo BBs is started after the pseudo RB ends, there is a possibility that a reel lock effect such as a freeze may occur before the pseudo bonus start rotation effect described later.

Further, when the pseudo BB is started in 1G series after the end of the pseudo RB, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, after the third stop of the end game of the pseudo RB of the current set, the reel of the next game is normal. In the period until the start of rotation, the effect game state returns from the pseudo-bonus state to the pseudo-bonus state again via the notification waiting state and the matching waiting state described later (transition form 6 to the transition form in FIG. 8 described later). A mode of shifting to the pseudo-bonus notification game in 2.).

Further, even if the pseudo RB game is completed without winning the stock lottery during the pseudo RB game period, the pseudo BB is won and started in the unit game of the first game immediately after the end of the pseudo RB. When this is done, as shown in FIG. 7, the pseudo RB game is continued. When the pseudo bonus continues in such a mode, although not shown in FIG. 7, in detail, from the third stop of the end game of the pseudo RB of the current set to the start of the normal rotation of the reel of the next game. During the period, the effect game state returns from the pseudo-bonus state to the pseudo-bonus state again via the normal game state and the matching waiting state described later (transition from the transition form 5 in FIG. 8 described later to the transition form 3). Aspect).

In the present embodiment, in the unit game of the pseudo bonus, when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB of the 1G series is won, a notification sound (BGM) for notifying that the pseudo BB of the 1G series is won is generated. In this notification sound (BGM) generation effect, the BGM may be changed each time the stock of 1G series of pseudo BBs is determined in one set of pseudo bonus games.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the start of the pseudo-bonus, it is internally determined whether or not to perform the pseudo-BB of 1G series after the end of the pseudo-bonus of the current set, so that the operation of the AT is changed. Can be added. As a result, in the present embodiment, the player's interest in AT operation can be maintained.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the stocked pseudo-bonus continuation form (ream villa form) is only 1G ream will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. After the pseudo-bonus is completed in the state where the stock of the pseudo-bonus exists in addition to the 1G series, for example, after once shifting to the game in the normal game state and the normal game for a predetermined period (predetermined number of games) is digested. , The pseudo-bonus of the continuation form (so-called continuation form via the precursor) in which the stocked pseudo-bonus game is executed may be configured to be stockable.

[Transition form of production game state within the unit game period]
Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the transition form of the effect game state within the unit game (1 game) period will be described. Note that FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game operation in the unit game and the transition timing of the effect game state.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal game state and the pseudo bonus state (pseudo BB state and the pseudo RB state) are provided as the effect game state managed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51). Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also manages the states of various effects performed during the transition from the normal gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo-bonus is won, in the unit game at the start of the pseudo-bonus, an effect for notifying the winning of the pseudo-bonus (“pseudo-bonus start rotation effect” in FIG. 8) is provided. Will be done. In this pseudo-bonus start rotation effect, notification (lighting of the notification lamp), reel rotation start, and reel automatic stop are performed in this order. Then, the reel operation control and the lighting instruction of the notification lamp to the sub control circuit 42 in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect are executed by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51). The notification lamp shows a specific example of the notification means according to the present invention.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also manages a state in which the pseudo bonus start rotation effect is performed as the effect game state. As will be described later, in the automatic reel stop effect, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus (“REG alignment” and “BIG” described later) are finally placed on predetermined virtual lines set on the three reels. Since the symbol combination called "alignment" is automatically stopped (aligned), the state in which the pseudo-bonus start reel effect is performed is referred to as "alignment waiting state" below.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described later, not only the type in which the pseudo bonus is started in the winning game but also the type in which the pseudo bonus is started from the next game of the winning game is provided as the winning type of the pseudo bonus. There is. In the latter case, the state from the winning of the pseudo bonus to the occurrence of the notification effect of the next game is the waiting state of the notification effect (lighting effect of the notification lamp). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) also has a state between the winning of the pseudo-bonus and the occurrence of the notification effect of the next game (hereinafter, referred to as "notification waiting state") as the effect game state. to manage.

Hereinafter, the contents of various transition forms (transition forms 1 to 6 in FIG. 8) of the above-mentioned various effect game states in the unit game will be described.

(1) Transition form 1
The transition form 1 in FIG. 8 is a transition form of the effect game state when the pseudo bonus lottery is not won (lost) in the normal game.

In the transition form 1, first, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player in the normal game state (“lever” operation in FIG. 8), the normal game is started and a pseudo bonus lottery is performed (in FIG. 8). "Pseudo bonus lottery (cancellation lottery)" operation). Then, when the pseudo bonus lottery is not won, the directed game state does not change and the normal game state is maintained. After that, the weight time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is digested (“weight digestion” operation in FIG. 8).

The reel is then rotationally started by a normal acceleration process (the "real start" operation in FIG. 8) and accelerated to a predetermined rotational speed. After that, when all the reels are stopped (the "third stop end" operation in FIG. 8), one game of the normal game when the pseudo bonus lottery is non-winning (loss) ends. In these series of game operations, the directed game state does not change, and the normal game state is maintained. That is, in the normal game of the transition form 1, the directed game state does not change and the normal game state is maintained during the period of one game.

(2) Transition form 2
In the present embodiment, there are four types of pseudo bonus types to be won in the pseudo bonus lottery of the normal game, which are referred to as "current game pseudo RB", "current game pseudo BB", "next game pseudo RB", and "next game pseudo BB". Pseudo-bonus types are provided (see FIGS. 38 and 39 below).

The "current game pseudo RB" is a pseudo RB in which the pseudo RB is notified and the game is started in the winning unit game, and the "current game pseudo BB" is the pseudo BB notification and the start of the game in the winning unit game. Is a pseudo BB in which Further, the "next game pseudo RB" is a pseudo RB in which the pseudo RB is announced and the game is started in the next unit game of the winning unit game, and the "next game pseudo BB" is the next unit game after the winning unit game. This is a pseudo BB in which a pseudo BB is announced and a game is started in the unit game of.

The transition form 2 is a transition form of the effect game state when the pseudo bonus type "next game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo BB" is won in the pseudo bonus lottery (release lottery) of the normal game.

In the transition mode 2, first, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player in the normal game state, the normal game is started and a pseudo bonus lottery is performed. Then, when the pseudo bonus type "next game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo BB" is won by the pseudo bonus lottery, the directed game state shifts from the normal game state to the notification waiting state as shown in FIG. After that, the notification waiting state is maintained until the execution of various lottery processes at the time of lever-on in the next game (pseudo-bonus notification game) of the pseudo-bonus winning game. That is, various game operations after the pseudo-bonus lottery in the winning game are performed in a state of waiting for notification. In the transition form 2, in the next game of the winning game, the pseudo BB stock lottery is performed, but the pseudo bonus lottery is not performed.

Next, when various lottery processes are executed when the lever is turned on in the next game (pseudo-bonus notification game), the production game state changes from the notification waiting state to the uniform waiting state. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is exhausted, the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is performed. Specifically, first, a notification effect (notification lamp lighting effect) is performed, then reel rotation (forward rotation or reverse rotation) is started (not shown), and then an automatic reel stop effect is performed. ..

In the automatic stop effect of the reels, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus (a symbol combination called "REG alignment" and "BIG alignment" described later) is automatically stopped on predetermined virtual lines set on the three reels. When the effect is completed, the effect game state changes from the waiting state to the pseudo-bonus state, and the pseudo-bonus game is started. Then, when the pseudo-bonus state is started, the reel is rotationally started by a normal acceleration process and accelerated to a predetermined rotational speed. After that, when all the reels are stopped, the game of the first game of the pseudo bonus ends.

In the present embodiment, when the pseudo-bonus is announced in the next game of the pseudo-bonus winning game as in the transition mode 2, the pseudo-bonus winning may be notified in advance before the start of the next game. For example, in a pseudo-bonus winning game, the notification lamp may be turned on for a moment after the third stop of the reel. By providing such an advance notice effect, the player can know the winning of the pseudo bonus before the announcement effect of the next game.

(3) Transition form 3
The transition form 3 is a transition form of the effect game state when the pseudo bonus type "current game pseudo RB" or "current game pseudo BB" is won in the pseudo bonus lottery (release lottery) of the normal game.

In the transition mode 3, first, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player in the normal game state, the normal game is started and a pseudo bonus lottery is performed. Then, when the pseudo-bonus type “current game pseudo RB” or “current game pseudo BB” is won by the pseudo-bonus lottery, the directed game state shifts from the normal game state to the waiting state as shown in FIG. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is exhausted, the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is performed. Specifically, first, a notification effect (notification lamp lighting effect) is performed, then reel rotation (forward rotation or reverse rotation) is started (not shown), and then an automatic reel stop effect is performed. ..

In the automatic stop effect of the reels, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus (a symbol combination called "REG alignment" and "BIG alignment" described later) is automatically stopped on predetermined virtual lines set on the three reels. When the effect is completed, the effect game state changes from the waiting state to the pseudo-bonus state, and the pseudo-bonus game is started. Then, when the pseudo-bonus state is started, the reel is rotationally started by a normal acceleration process and accelerated to a predetermined rotational speed. After that, when all the reels are stopped, the game of the first game of the pseudo bonus ends.

(4) Transition form 4
The transition form 4 is a transition form of the effect game state in the unit game during the pseudo bonus.

In the transition form 4, first, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player in the pseudo-bonus state, the pseudo-bonus game is started. In the pseudo-bonus state, the pseudo-BB stock lottery is performed for each unit game, but the pseudo-bonus lottery is not performed.

Next, when the weight time (4.1 sec) is exhausted from the start of the previous game, the reel is rotationally started by a normal acceleration process and accelerated to a predetermined rotational speed. After that, when all the reels are stopped, the unit game of the pseudo bonus ends.

In such a transition mode 4, the effect game state does not change and the pseudo bonus state is maintained during the period of one game.

(5) Transition form 5
The transition form 5 is a transition form of the production game state of the pseudo bonus end (final) game in the case where the pseudo bonus ends and the production game state transitions to the normal game state without winning the stock lottery of the pseudo BB. ..

In the transition form 5, first, in the end game in the pseudo-bonus state, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player, the pseudo-bonus end game is started. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is exhausted, the reel is rotationally started by a normal acceleration process and accelerated to a predetermined rotational speed.

Next, when the reels are completely stopped in the end game, the game of the pseudo bonus end game ends. Then, in the transition form 5, at the end of the pseudo-bonus, the effect game state transitions from the pseudo-bonus state to the normal game state. The transition form after the game is completed in the transition form 5 is any of the transition forms 1 to 3. Then, when the effect game state shifts from the transition form 5 to the transition form 3, the pseudo bonus is continuously performed.

(6) Transition form 6
The transition form 6 is a transition form of the production game state of the pseudo-bonus end (final) game when the pseudo-BB is started in 1G series after the end of the pseudo-bonus game.

In the transition form 6, first, in the end game in the pseudo-bonus state, when the start lever 16 is operated by the player, the pseudo-bonus end game is started. Next, when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is exhausted, the reel is rotationally started by a normal acceleration process and accelerated to a predetermined rotational speed.

Next, when all the reels are stopped in the end game, the game of the pseudo-bonus end game ends, but in the transition form 6, after the end of the pseudo-bonus of the current set, the pseudo-bonus of the stocked 1G series starts (releases). ).

Therefore, when all the reels are stopped in the end game of the pseudo bonus of the current set, the effect game state shifts from the pseudo bonus state to the notification waiting state. The transition form after the end game of the pseudo-bonus in the transition form 6 ends is the transition form of the pseudo-bonus notification game in the transition form 2. Therefore, in the transition form 6, when the end game of the pseudo bonus ends and the production game state shifts to the notification waiting state, the notification waiting state executes various lottery processes when the lever of the next game (pseudo bonus notification game) is turned on. It will be maintained until time.

<Various production lottery states>
In the present embodiment, various lottery is performed in the game in the normal game state and the game in the pseudo bonus state. For example, in a game in a normal game state, a pseudo-bonus lottery is performed, and in a pseudo-bonus game, a pseudo-BB stock lottery is performed.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of effect lottery states (modes) in which the winning probability of the pseudo bonus lottery and the winning probability of the stock lottery of the pseudo BB are different from each other are provided. Specifically, eight types of effect lottery states (modes) of modes 0 to 7 are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the unit game at the start of the pseudo-bonus and during the pseudo-bonus period, and the transition lottery of the effect lottery state (mode) are performed when the setting of the pachislot machine 1 is changed.

<Ceiling function>
The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function (so-called ceiling function) in which the granting of the pseudo-bonus is confirmed when the number of digested games of the normal game reaches the number of games for releasing the pseudo-bonus (so-called number of ceiling games).

Then, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of release games (“31”, “100 to 199”, and “1199”) are provided, and the number of pseudo-bonus release games selected from them is in the production lottery state (“31”, “100 to 199”, and “1199”). It changes according to the mode). Therefore, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, each time a mode transition lottery is performed, a lottery process for the number of games for releasing the pseudo bonus (next pseudo bonus described later) is performed based on the changed effect lottery state (mode). Transition game number lottery processing) is performed.

<Pseudo-bonus start rotation production>
[Outline of operation of pseudo-bonus start rotation body production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the contents of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect performed at the start of the pseudo-bonus will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an operation flow of the pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect. In addition, the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is performed in a state where a lock that invalidates or delays the game operation by the player is generated.

First, when the pseudo bonus is won by the pseudo bonus lottery when the lever is turned on, the predetermined notification weight time of the pseudo bonus is set. The notification wait time is a weight period provided to keep the start timing of the automatic stop effect of the reel, which will be described later, constant regardless of the symbol stop position of the reel at the end of the previous game. The notification weight time can be set arbitrarily, but in the present embodiment, it is set to 2000 msec regardless of the type of the winning pseudo-bonus.

Next, after the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is exhausted, the notification effect is performed by lighting the notification lamp. In this notification effect, for example, an image of a specific pattern is lit by a plurality of LEDs (notification lamps: not shown) arranged in a matrix on the display device 11. The operation of this notification effect is controlled by the sub control circuit 42 based on the lighting instruction information (information included in the start command) of the notification lamp transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

The notification effect is not limited to a simple effect of turning on the notification lamp (LED). For example, a liquid crystal display device may be used as the display device 11 to perform a notification effect using a moving image (video). In this case, it is preferable to produce the content so that the notification by the moving image (video) is completed in the period from the start of the notification effect (after the weight time from the start of the previous game is exhausted) to the start of the reel rotation. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the lighting effect of the notification lamp is performed after the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is exhausted will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if it is after the weight time (4.1 sec) has been digested and the timing is within the period of the notification weight time, the notification lamp can be turned on at any timing. Further, for example, if the timing is after the weight time (4.1 sec) has been digested and before the symbol combination of "REG alignment" or "BIG alignment" described later is automatically stopped, the notification lamp is displayed at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to perform the lighting effect of.

Next, the three reels are rotationally driven in a predetermined pattern (forward rotation, reverse rotation, etc.). After that, the stop preparation operation 1 and the stop preparation operation 2 for stopping the specific symbol combination on the predetermined virtual line are performed by the automatic stop effect of the reel.

In the stop preparation operation 1, during the rotation of the reels, the symbol "red 7" of the left reel 3L, the symbol "red 7" of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "red" of the right reel 3R constituting a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo BB. The symbol "Red 7" on the left reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" on the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "BAR" on the right reel 3R, which constitute the relative positional relationship of "7" or a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo RB. The rotation speed of each reel is finely adjusted so that the relative positional relationship of is a predetermined positional relationship. The method of adjusting the relative positional relationship of the symbols of each reel in the stop preparation operation 1 is not limited to this example, and for example, a method of shifting the rotation start timing of each reel may be adopted.

For example, when the reels are automatically stopped in the normal stop pattern described later (see FIGS. 10A and 10B described later) at the start of the pseudo BB, the symbol "red 7" on the left reel 3L and the symbol "red" on the middle reel 3C are used. The rotation speed of each reel is finely adjusted so that the "7" and the symbol "Red 7" of the right reel 3R are lined up in a horizontal row during the rotation of the reels. When the reels are automatically stopped in the normal stop pattern described later at the start of the pseudo RB, the symbol "Red 7" on the left reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" on the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "BAR" on the right reel 3R. However, the rotation speed of each reel is finely adjusted so that it is lined up in a horizontal row while the reels are rotating.

Next, in the stop preparation operation 2, a process of determining whether or not the pseudo-bonus notification wait time (2000 msec) set when the lever is turned on has elapsed is performed. If it is determined by this determination process that the notification weight time has not elapsed, the system waits until the notification weight time is exhausted.

Then, after the pseudo-bonus notification wait time has elapsed, and after the reel has rotated once, the automatic stop effect of the reel is started. Then, in the automatic reel stop effect, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus (a symbol combination referred to as "REG alignment" or "BIG alignment" described later) is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line in a predetermined automatic stop pattern. Will be done.

In the reel automatic stop effect, a plurality of types of reel automatic stop patterns (stop effect patterns) are prepared, and a predetermined automatic stop pattern is determined from the plurality of types of automatic stop patterns by lottery. In addition, according to the type of the automatic stop pattern, the type of the specific symbol combination (the symbol combination referred to as "REG alignment" and "BIG alignment" described later) related to the pseudo bonus that is automatically stopped, and the specific symbol combination The type of virtual line to be stopped is also automatically determined. The contents of each automatic stop pattern will be described in detail later.

Next, when the automatic stop effect of the reel is completed, a reel lock called "pseudo bonus winning lock" is generated. During the operation period of the pseudo-bonus winning lock, the sub-control circuit 42 performs various effects (for example, occurrence of fanfare) for notifying the start of the pseudo-bonus. The lock time of the pseudo bonus winning lock can be appropriately changed according to the type of the pseudo bonus to be started. For example, the lock time of the pseudo bonus winning lock at the start of the pseudo BB is set to 4000 msec, and the lock time of the pseudo bonus winning lock is set to 4000 msec, and the pseudo RB starts. The lock time of the pseudo-bonus winning lock can be set to 700 msec.

Then, when the lock time of the pseudo-bonus winning lock elapses, the normal rotation of the reel (normal acceleration processing) is executed, and the game of the first game of the pseudo-bonus is started.

In the present embodiment, at the start of the pseudo-bonus, the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect (reel action) is performed as described above. When the pseudo-bonus of the pseudo-bonus type "current game pseudo-RB" or "current game pseudo-BB" is won, the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect described above is executed in the winning game, and the pseudo-bonus is generated from the winning game. It will be started. Further, when the pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type "next game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo BB" is won, the above-mentioned pseudo bonus start rotation effect is executed in the next game of the winning game, and is simulated from the next game. The bonus starts.

When the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is provided, in the pseudo-bonus start game, a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo-bonus is automatically referred to as "REG alignment" and "BIG alignment" described later during the lock period. The symbol combination) stops on a predetermined virtual line, and the pseudo-bonus game is started. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo-bonus game (special game) can be started regardless of the skill of the player.

Normally, after the start operation of the start game in the pseudo-bonus state is detected, the reel rotation start operation is performed, and then a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo-bonus (a symbol combination referred to as "REG alignment" or "BIG alignment" described later) is obtained. , The time until the player stops on the predetermined virtual line is not constant because it depends on the position of the symbol that was stopped and displayed before the start game of the pseudo bonus. That is, the executable period of the notification effect by the notification lamp (time for notification effect) depends on the position of the symbol that has been stopped and displayed before the start game of the pseudo bonus. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the period from the detection of the start operation to the start of the operation of automatically stopping the combination of specific symbols on the predetermined virtual line is set to the predetermined notification weight time (2000 msec). It can be set and the notification effect by the notification lamp can be executed within the period of this notification weight time. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to secure the notification effect time that does not depend on the position of the symbol that has been stopped and displayed before the start game of the pseudo bonus.

Further, in the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect described above, the pseudo-bonus winning is announced when the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game elapses, and then the reel rotation operation is started. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the pattern of reel rotation operation (reverse rotation, etc.) at the start of the pseudo bonus is increased, a specific symbol combination finally related to the pseudo bonus after the start of rotation of the reel (described later, "" It becomes difficult for the player to recognize that (the combination of symbols called "REG alignment" and "BIG alignment") is automatically stopped by the effect (stopping during locking). In addition, as in the normal game (when the pseudo bonus start rotation effect (lock) does not occur), the reel rotation operation is started after the wait time (4.1 sec) has elapsed from the start of the previous game, so that the reel rotation operation is started. It is possible to prevent the presence or absence of the bonus start reel effect (lock) from being immediately determined. From these things, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the notification effect of the pseudo bonus winning more effective.

[Various automatic stop patterns for reels]
In the present embodiment, as the reel automatic stop pattern (stop effect pattern) in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect, "normal stop pattern", "all rotation cylinder simultaneous stop pattern", "high speed stop pattern", "long stop pattern" , "Re-stop pattern" and six types of automatic stop patterns called "sway stop pattern" are provided. Hereinafter, an outline of the operation of each automatic stop pattern will be described with reference to the drawings (see FIG. 17 below for the symbol arrangement in each figure).

(1) Normal stop pattern In the normal stop pattern, the left reel 3L is automatically stopped on the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification weight time has elapsed), and the middle reel 3C is automatically stopped on the second lap. Then, the right reel 3R is automatically stopped on the third lap, or the right reel 3R is automatically stopped on the first lap, the middle reel 3C is automatically stopped on the second lap, and the left reel 3L is automatically stopped on the third lap. It is a stop pattern to do. This normal stop pattern may be executed in both the pseudo bonus start rotation effect at the start of the pseudo BB and the pseudo bonus start rotation effect at the start of the pseudo RB.

In the normal stop pattern at the start of the pseudo BB, a specific symbol combination "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" (hereinafter referred to as "BIG alignment") related to the pseudo BB is set on three reels. It is stopped and displayed on a predetermined virtual line (either the center line, the top line, the bottom line, the cross-down line, or the cross-up line). Further, in the normal stop pattern at the start of the pseudo RB, the specific symbol combination "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"BAR" (hereinafter referred to as "REG alignment") related to the pseudo RB is a predetermined virtual line (center). Stop is displayed on the line, top line, bottom line, cross down line or cross up line).

10A and 10B show an example of a stop operation of a normal stop pattern. Note that FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a stop operation of the normal stop pattern performed in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect at the start of the pseudo RB, and is a stop of the normal stop pattern that automatically stops the "REG alignment" on the center line. It is a figure which shows the operation. On the other hand, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a stop operation of a normal stop pattern performed in a pseudo bonus start rotation effect at the start of a pseudo BB, and is a stop of a normal stop pattern that automatically stops "BIG alignment" on the center line. It is a figure which shows the operation.

In the normal stop pattern shown in FIG. 10A, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the first lap after the end of the stop preparation operation 2 (after the lapse of the pseudo bonus notification wait time). At this time, the left reel 3L is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the left reel 3L. Next, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the second lap. At this time, the middle reel 3C is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the middle reel 3C. Then, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the third lap. At this time, the right reel 3R is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "BAR" stops in the middle region of the right reel 3R.

In the normal stop pattern shown in FIG. 10B, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the first lap after the end of the stop preparation operation 2 (after the lapse of the pseudo bonus notification wait time). At this time, the left reel 3L is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the left reel 3L. Next, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the second lap. At this time, the middle reel 3C is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the middle reel 3C. Then, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the third lap. At this time, the right reel 3R is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the right reel 3R.

(2) Simultaneous stop pattern for all reels Although not shown, the simultaneous stop pattern for all reels is not shown, but all three reels are automatically stopped at the same time on the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification weight time has elapsed). It is a stop pattern to do. If it is decided to execute the simultaneous stop pattern for all rotation cylinders, after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed and the predetermined wait time for simultaneous stoppage of all rotation cylinders is exhausted, the reel The automatic stop operation is started.

The all-rotation simultaneous stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect at the start of the pseudo-BB. In addition, in the simultaneous stop pattern for all rotations, "BIG alignment" is automatically stopped on the center line.

(3) High-speed stop pattern In the high-speed stop pattern, three reels are arranged in a predetermined order (left reel 3L, middle reel in this embodiment) in the first lap after the end of the stop preparation operation 2 (after the lapse of the pseudo bonus notification wait time). It is a stop pattern that automatically stops in the order of 3C and right reel 3R). The high-speed stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect at the start of the pseudo-BB.

FIG. 11 shows an example of a stop operation of a high-speed stop pattern. In the high-speed pattern shown in FIG. 11, first, the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the left reel 3L and the symbol "red 7" stops in the upper region of the middle reel 3C at the stages of the stop preparation operations 1 and 2. Then, a state in which the right reel 3R is rotating is generated.

Next, when the symbol "Red 7" reaches a position one higher than the upper region of the right reel 3R in the rotating right reel 3R after the pseudo-bonus notification weight time has elapsed (hereinafter, this state is referred to as "". The automatic stop effect of the three reels (referred to as the "misaligned" state) is started, and the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are also rotationally started again. That is, at the timing when the "BIG alignment" is aligned on the line (preparation line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the upper region of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol region on the upper side of the upper region of the right reel 3R. The automatic stop effect of the three reels is started. Then, on the first lap after the start of the automatic stop effect of the three reels, the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped in this order. At this time, the three reels are stopped and controlled so that the "BIG alignment" is stopped on the center line.

More specifically, in this high-speed stop pattern, after the misaligned state is generated, the left reel 3L is rotationally moved by 20 frames in the forward direction to stop, and the middle reel 3C is rotationally moved by 21 frames in the forward direction. Then, the right reel 3R is rotationally moved by 22 frames in the forward direction to stop. That is, in the high-speed stop pattern, after the shift state is generated, the "BIG alignment" is stopped on the center line before the reel makes two laps. In this stop pattern, the symbol combination can be changed to "BIG alignment" (red 7 alignment) in the shortest time from the misaligned state (preparation state).

By providing the above-mentioned automatic stop effect of the reel of the high-speed stop pattern as one of the reel effects, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of interesting reel actions. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's interest in reel action (reel production).

In the present embodiment, an example in which the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are stopped and the right reel 3R is rotating when the misaligned state is generated has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R may be stopped and the left reel 3L is rotating to generate a misaligned state, or the right reel 3R and the left reel 3L may be stopped and the middle reel 3C is rotating. As a result, a state of misalignment may be generated.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the automatic stop effect of the high-speed stop pattern can be generated only at the start of the pseudo BB has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the automatic stop of the high-speed stop pattern is also performed at the start of the pseudo RB. The configuration may be such that the effect can be generated.

In this case, the flow of the reel automatic stop operation from the stop preparation operations 1 and 2 is as follows. First, a state is generated in which the symbol "Red 7" is stopped in the middle region of the left reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" is stopped in the upper region of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is rotating. Next, after the pseudo-bonus notification weight time has elapsed, the symbol "BAR" has reached a position one higher than the upper region of the right reel 3R in the rotating right reel 3R (a state of deviation is generated). At the same timing, the automatic stop effect of the three reels is started, and the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are also started to rotate again. After that, in the same manner as the stop operation described with reference to FIG. 11, the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped in this order on the first lap after the start of the automatic stop effect of the three reels, and are on the center line. "REG alignment" is stopped.

(4) Long stop pattern In the long stop pattern, the left reel 3L is automatically stopped on the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification weight time has elapsed), and the middle reel 3C is automatically stopped on the second lap. Then, it is a stop pattern that automatically stops the right reel 3R on the 4th lap instead of the 3rd lap. The long stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect at the start of the pseudo BB. Further, in the long stop pattern, "BIG alignment" is automatically stopped on the center line.

FIG. 12 shows an example of a stop operation of a long stop pattern. In the long stop pattern, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first lap after the end of the stop preparation operation 2 (after the lapse of the pseudo bonus notification wait time). At this time, the left reel 3L is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the left reel 3L. Next, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the second lap. At this time, the middle reel 3C is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "Red 7" stops in the middle region of the middle reel 3C. Then, on the third lap, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the fourth lap without stopping the right reel 3R. At this time, the right reel 3R is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the right reel 3R.

(5) Re-stop pattern In the re-stop pattern, first, the left reel 3L is automatically stopped on the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification wait time has elapsed), and the middle reel 3C is stopped on the second lap. It automatically stops and automatically stops the right reel 3R on the third lap. Then, at this point, the three reels are stopped and controlled so that the "REG alignment" is stopped on the center line. Next, the left reel 3L or the right reel 3R is moved again to stop "BIG alignment" on a predetermined virtual line. That is, in the restart pattern, once the pseudo bonus to be started appears to be a pseudo RB, the pseudo bonus to be started is notified to be a pseudo BB.

The restart pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect at the start of the pseudo BB. Further, in the re-stop pattern, when the left reel 3L is finally re-moved, the "BIG alignment" is stopped on the cross-down line, and when the right reel 3R is re-moved at the end, "BIG alignment" is displayed. "BIG alignment" is stopped on the center line.

FIG. 13 shows an example of a stop operation of the restart pattern. In the re-stop pattern, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first lap after the end of the stop preparation operation 2 (after the lapse of the pseudo bonus notification wait time). At this time, the left reel 3L is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "Red 7" stops in the middle region of the left reel 3L. Next, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the second lap. At this time, the middle reel 3C is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the middle reel 3C. Next, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the third lap. At this time, the right reel 3R is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "BAR" stops in the middle region of the right reel 3R. Therefore, at this point, the "REG alignment" is stopped on the center line.

After that, when the right reel 3R is rotated and moved in the opposite direction (in the direction from the bottom to the top in FIG. 13) by one frame to stop, "BIG alignment" is the center line as shown in A after the stop in FIG. Stopped on. Further, after the "REG alignment" is temporarily stopped on the center line, the left reel 3L is rotated and moved in the opposite direction (in the direction from the bottom to the top in FIG. 13) by one frame to stop, in FIG. After the stop, as shown in B, the "BIG alignment" is stopped on the cross-down line.

In the stop operation example of the restop pattern shown in FIG. 13, an example in which the right reel 3R or the left reel 3L is finally rotated and moved by one frame in the opposite direction to stop is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, after the "REG alignment" is temporarily stopped on the center line, the right reel 3R is rotated and moved in the forward direction (from top to bottom in FIG. 13) by 19 frames to move the "BIG alignment" to the center line. You may stop it up. Further, for example, after the "REG alignment" is temporarily stopped on the center line, the left reel 3L may be rotationally moved by 19 frames in the forward direction to stop the "BIG alignment" on the cross down line.

(6) Shaking stop pattern In the shaking stop pattern, the left reel 3L is automatically stopped on the first lap after the stop preparation operation 2 is completed (after the pseudo bonus notification weight time has elapsed), and the middle reel 3C is automatically stopped on the second lap. Then, on the third lap, the right reel 3R is automatically stopped. However, in the sway stop pattern, each reel is not completely stopped, and the reels are alternately rotated in a minute range in the forward direction and the reverse direction around the stop position. That is, in the shaking stop pattern, each reel is stopped in a state of shaking (vibrating state) along the rotation direction of the reels with the stop position as the center.

In addition, the shaking stop pattern may be executed only in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect at the start of the pseudo BB. Further, in the shaking stop pattern, "BIG alignment" is automatically stopped on the center line.

FIG. 14 shows an example of a stop operation of the shaking stop pattern. In the sway stop pattern, first, the left reel 3L is stopped by the automatic stop operation of the first lap after the end of the stop preparation operation 2 (after the lapse of the pseudo bonus notification wait time). At this time, the left reel 3L is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the left reel 3L, and the left reel 3L is minutely aligned with the rotation direction of the reel around the stop position. It is controlled to sway in the range (rotate and move alternately in the forward and reverse directions).

Next, the middle reel 3C is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the second lap. At this time, the middle reel 3C is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "Red 7" stops in the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle reel 3C is minutely aligned with the rotation direction of the reel around the stop position. It is controlled to swing in the range.

Then, the right reel 3R is stopped by the automatic stop operation on the third lap. At this time, the right reel 3R is stopped and controlled so that the symbol "red 7" stops in the middle region of the right reel 3R, and the right reel 3R is minutely aligned with the rotation direction of the reel around the stop position. It is controlled to sway in the range.

[Various stop positions of reel]
In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of stop positions (stop lines) of "BIG alignment" or "REG alignment" that are finally stopped and displayed by the automatic stop effect of the reels are provided. FIG. 15 shows various stop positions (stop lines) of “BIG alignment” and “REG alignment”.

In the present embodiment, the stop positions (stop lines) of the "REG alignment" are on the cross down line (stop position 1 in FIG. 15 (cross down REG alignment)) and on the center line (stop position 2 in FIG. 15 (stop line)). Middle REG alignment)), on the cross-up line (stop position 3 in FIG. 15 (cross-up REG alignment)), on the top line (stop position 4 in FIG. 15 (upper REG alignment)), and on the bottom line ( Five types of stop positions are provided, which are the stop positions 5 (lower REG alignment) in FIG. Further, in the present embodiment, the stop positions (stop lines) of the "BIG alignment" are on the cross down line (stop position 6 in FIG. 15 (cross down BIG alignment)) and on the center line (stop position in FIG. 15). 7 (middle BIG alignment)), on the cross-up line (stop position 8 in FIG. 15 (cross-up BIG alignment)), on the top line (stop position 9 in FIG. 15 (upper BIG alignment)), and bottom line. Five types of stop positions are provided above (stop positions 10 in FIG. 15 (lower BIG alignment)).

Since the type of the stop position (stop line) of "BIG alignment" or "REG alignment" is determined according to the reel automatic stop pattern (stop effect pattern), the reel automatic stop pattern (stop effect pattern) is determined. ) Is determined, the type of stop position (stop line) of "BIG alignment" or "REG alignment" is also uniquely determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, the automatic stop effect of the stop position 9 (upper BIG alignment) is a mode for the consecutive villas in which the effect lottery state (mode 6 or mode 7) is easy for the pseudo BB to win, and the number of consecutive villas. It is an effect that suggests that it is a mode that can be expected (such as the loop rate of the mode itself is high). In the present embodiment, the automatic stop effect of the stop position 9 (upper BIG alignment) may be selected only when the effect lottery state is mode 6 or mode 7 (see FIG. 60 described later).

<Various reel locks executed during the pseudo-bonus game period>
[Various reel locks at the start of pseudo bonus]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of generating a reel lock at the start (or winning) of the pseudo bonus. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of generating a reel lock as a pseudo-bonus start or a notification effect of winning.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of reel locks are provided as the reel locks to be generated at this time. Specifically, a reel lock having a short lock time called "short lock" and a reel lock having a long lock time called "freeze" are provided. Further, the freeze is provided with two types of reel locks, "freeze A" and "freeze B".

In the present embodiment, the lock time of the short lock (specific lock) is 1000 msec, the lock time of freeze A is 30,000 msec, and the lock time of freeze B is 2000 msec. Further, when the freeze B is executed, the game is set so that the game can be played after 30,000 msec has elapsed from the start of the lock of the freeze B.

Whether or not these reel locks are generated and the type of reel locks to be generated are determined by the reel lock lottery performed in the winning game of the pseudo bonus. At this time, as the type of reel lock to be won, the reel locks of short lock, freeze A and freeze B may be won independently, both short lock and freeze A, or short lock and freeze B. In some cases both will win.

Then, when the execution of the predetermined reel lock is determined by the reel lock lottery, in the winning game or the start game of the pseudo bonus, the reel is released after the weight time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game is exhausted. The lock is executed. That is, the reel lock is executed before the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus start rotation effect (before the notification of the pseudo-bonus).

The various reel locks described above are mainly configured to be generated when a pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type "next game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo BB" is won (FIG. 40 described later). -See FIG. 47). Then, when the pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type "next game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo BB" is won and the short lock is won as the reel lock, in the game in which the pseudo bonus is won, from the start of the previous game. After the weight time is exhausted, a short lock occurs. In this case, the effect of delaying the start of the game (start of rotation of the reel) is performed.

On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type "next game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo BB" is won and Freeze A or Freeze B is won as the reel lock, the next game of the game in which the pseudo bonus is won ( In the pseudo-bonus notification game), freeze A or freeze B occurs after the weight time from the start of the previous game (winning game) is exhausted, and then the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is executed.

Furthermore, if the pseudo bonus of the pseudo bonus type "next game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo BB" is won, and the short lock and freeze A or freeze B are won as the reel lock, the pseudo bonus is won. In the game, after the weight time from the start of the previous game was exhausted, a short lock occurred, and in the next game of the game in which the pseudo bonus was won, the weight time from the start of the previous game (winning game) was exhausted. After that, freeze A or freeze B occurs, and then the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the presence / absence of short lock is managed by a flag called "short lock flag", the presence / absence of freeze A is managed by a flag called "freeze A flag", and the occurrence of freeze B occurs. The presence or absence is managed by a flag called "freeze B flag". Further, in the following, the flags that manage the presence or absence of the occurrence of these reel locks are collectively referred to as "effect reservation flags". These effect reservation flags are stored in the main RAM 53.

[Long weight production function]
In the present embodiment, as described above, in the start game of the pseudo bonus, the stock lottery of the pseudo BB of 1G series is performed. Then, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the stock lottery is won, a pseudo bonus of a predetermined number of games (70 games in the case of pseudo BB, 20 games in the case of pseudo RB) executed after the current game. In a specific unit game within the period, it is provided with a function of executing a lock effect (hereinafter, referred to as "long weight effect") that slightly extends the weight time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game.

Specifically, in the long weight production, when the 1G series of pseudo BB stock lottery is won in the start game of the pseudo bonus, in the unit game of the pseudo bonus of the specific number of games after the second game, after the lever is turned on, the previous game After the weight time (4.1 sec) from the start is digested, a short lock of a predetermined lock time (1000 msec in the present embodiment) is generated. The presence or absence of this long weight effect and the generated game are determined by lottery.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the start game of the pseudo bonus, it is internally determined whether or not to perform the pseudo BB of 1G series after the end of the game period of the pseudo bonus of the current set. Further, in the present embodiment, when a 1G series of pseudo BBs is won in the start game of the pseudo bonus, a long weight effect is performed in which a 1G series of pseudo BB wins is expected in the middle of the game period of the pseudo bonus of the current set. Will be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the AT operation, and also to enhance the player's interest in the game during the pseudo-bonus game period.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the pseudo-bonus game period, a 1 G series of pseudo BB stock lottery is performed for each unit game. The Pachislot 1 of the present embodiment also has a function capable of generating a long weight effect (generation of a short lock) in the corresponding lottery game when the stock lottery is won. It should be noted that whether or not a long weight effect is generated triggered by the winning of the stock lottery in this pseudo bonus is determined by the lottery.

When the occurrence timing of the long weight effect triggered by the winning of the stock lottery during the pseudo bonus overlaps with the occurrence timing of the long weight effect set as the trigger of the winning of the stock lottery in the above-mentioned start game of the pseudo bonus. , One long weight effect (short lock) is executed without generating the long weight effect (short lock) twice.

In the present embodiment, the presence / absence of the long weight effect is managed by the short lock flag that manages the presence / absence of the short lock determined by the reel lock lottery described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect reservation flag for managing the presence or absence of the occurrence of a long weight effect is provided separately from the effect reservation flag for managing the presence or absence of the occurrence of a short lock determined by the reel lock lottery. You may.

[Mode of rotation start sound when short lock occurs]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game during the pseudo-bonus, a short lock (long weight effect) may occur as a reel effect at the start of the game. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the start lever 16 is operated and the reel rotation operation is started, a predetermined sound (hereinafter, referred to as “rotation start sound”) is emitted from the speakers 20L and 20R at the start of the reel rotation. It is equipped with a production (specific production) function that is generated from. The operation of generating the rotation start sound of the reel is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

Then, in the present embodiment, if the mode of generating the rotation start sound when the short lock occurs is different from that when the short lock does not occur (for example, at the start of a normal game or at the start of a reel effect in which the short lock does not occur). Let me.

16A and 16B are diagrams showing a mode (generation timing) of generation of the reel rotation start sound at the start of the game. FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a mode (generation timing) of generating a reel rotation start sound when a short lock is not generated, and FIG. 16B is a diagram showing a mode of generating a reel rotation start sound when a short lock is generated. ..

First, a mode in which the reel rotation start sound is generated when the short lock is not generated will be described. When the short lock does not occur, the main control circuit 41 transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub control circuit 42 at a specific timing after the operation of the start lever 16, and executes the reel rotation start operation. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16A, the sub-control circuit 42 generates a rotation start sound when the reel rotation start command is received. Therefore, when the short lock is not generated, the rotation start sound is generated at the start of the rotation operation of the reel.

Next, a mode in which the reel rotation start sound is generated when a short lock occurs will be described. When a short lock occurs (when a long weight effect occurs), the main control circuit 41 first starts a short lock (long weight effect) at a specific timing after operating the start lever 16, and also starts a short lock (long weight effect) and a sub control circuit 42. The effect instruction command described later (see FIG. 80 described later) is transmitted to. Then, when the short lock generation period elapses, the main control circuit 41 executes the reel rotation start operation.

The effect instruction command is a command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 for each trigger of various effect operations during the reel effect, and the effect command command is transmitted with information corresponding to the trigger set. Therefore, for example, at the start of the short lock (long weight effect), an effect instruction command in which information indicating the start of the reel effect (long weight effect) is set is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. Further, the transmission timing (or reception timing on the sub side) of the effect instruction command transmitted at the start of the short lock (long weight effect) is substantially the same as that of the reel rotation start command when the short lock does not occur. That is, the timing of the rotation start sound when the short lock (long weight effect) is generated is substantially the same as the timing of the rotation start sound when the short lock is not generated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, the sub-control circuit 42 generates a rotation start sound when the effect instruction command is received at the start of the short lock (long weight effect).

That is, in the present embodiment, when the short lock occurs, the rotation start sound is generated at the start of the short lock, and then the rotation operation of the reel is started after the short lock generation period elapses. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the short lock occurs, the rotation start operation of the reel is delayed by the period of the short lock from the generation of the rotation start sound.

By providing such a rotation start sound effect function, when a short lock occurs, the rotation start sound is generated at the start of the effect while the rotation start sound is generated at the same time as the normal operation. Will be delayed from. Therefore, since a contradiction can be generated between the effect operation by the rotation start sound and the actual operation of the reel, an effective effect can be given to the player.

In the present embodiment, as an effect of generating a deviation from the rotation start operation of the reel when a short lock is generated, an effect of generating a rotation start sound has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. The above-mentioned effect technique at the time of short lock occurrence can be applied to any effect as long as it is an effect that performs a specific effect operation triggered by the start of rotation of the reel. For example, even when a predetermined effect is executed by the display device 11, the lamp group 21, the movable accessory, or the like triggered by the start of rotation of the reel, a short lock is performed in the same manner as the operation of the above-described rotation start sound generation effect. When it occurs, it may be controlled so that those effects and the reel rotation start operation deviate from each other.

[Reel lock function at the end of pseudo bonus]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of generating a reel lock (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo-bonus END lock”) after the third stop of the reel in the end game of one set of pseudo-bonus. The pseudo-bonus END lock is a lock that always occurs at the end of the pseudo-bonus, and is not only when the normal game is started after the end of one set of pseudo-bonus, but also in the first game after the end of one set of pseudo-bonus. And it is also done when the pseudo bonus is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, in the third stop post-effect processing performed after the display combination is confirmed (after the display command generation and storage processing is completed) and before the medal payout processing and the bonus operation check processing, a pseudo is performed. Perform a bonus END lock (see FIGS. 81 and 105 below). That is, in the present embodiment, when the display combination is a small combination, the pseudo bonus END lock is performed before the medal payout process, and when the display combination is the replay combination, before the automatic medal insertion process. Pseudo-bonus END lock is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display combination is a small combination, a pseudo bonus END lock is performed after the medal payout process, and when the display combination is a replay combination, the medal is automatically inserted. Pseudo-bonus END lock may be performed after the processing.

The lock time of the pseudo-bonus END lock changes according to the type of pseudo-bonus that ends. In the present embodiment, the lock time of the pseudo bonus END lock at the end of the pseudo BB is 5200 msec, and the lock time of the pseudo bonus END lock at the end of the pseudo RB is 2500 msec.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 68.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 17). (Refer to the symbol code table)) and defines the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel within the frame of the display window of each reel is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, in the order of proceeding in the direction of rotation of the reels (the direction from the symbol position "19" in FIG. 17 toward the symbol position "0") with the symbol position "0" as a reference, " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the value of the symbol counter ("0" to "19") and the symbol arrangement table, it is displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of each reel within the frame of the display window of each reel. It is possible to specify the type of symbol. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "7", the symbol position "8" is set in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of the left reel 3L in the frame of the left display window 4L, respectively. The symbol "bell", the symbol "replay 2" at the symbol position "7", and the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "6" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (Nos. 1 to 6) will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 23. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols (combination and combination name) predetermined according to the type of privilege (bonus, small combination, replay), the content (storage area, data) of the corresponding display combination code, and the number of payouts. Prescribe the correspondence with.

In the present embodiment, a prize is won when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the effective line (cross-down line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus. If the symbol combination displayed along the effective line does not match any of the symbol combinations specified in the symbol combination table, a so-called "loss" occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination of "loss" is specified by not specifying the symbol combination corresponding to "loss" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "missing" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify the "missing" symbol combination.

The various data described in the display combination code column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination code column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination code column is data for designating a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73 described later) in which the data of the corresponding symbol combination is stored. In this embodiment, 33 symbol code storage areas are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to differences in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the symbol combination in which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out. For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination related to the combination name "C_7 sheets A" (CD bell) is determined for the number of inserted three medals (the symbol combination "bell" related to "C_7 sheets A"). "-" Bell "-" Bell "is stopped and displayed on the valid line), seven medals are paid out.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name "C_Rip A1-1" (middle replay) is determined (the symbol combination "Bell"-"Replay 1"-"Bell" related to "C_Rip A1-1"". When "is stopped and displayed on the valid line), the replay is activated. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name "C_BB" (the symbol combination "Replay 3"-"Watermelon 1"-"Red 7" related to "C_BB" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. ) Is determined, BB (Big Bonus) is activated.

[Bonus activation table]
Next, the bonus operating table will be described with reference to FIG. 24. When the bonus game is activated, the bonus activation table serves as a game status flag storage area (see FIG. 70 described later), a bonus end number counter, a game possible count counter, and a winning count counter provided in the main RAM 53. Specify the data to be stored.

The game state flag is data for identifying the type of the operating game state (RT game state and bonus game state). Therefore, in the present embodiment, each game state flag indicating the RT0 game state, the RT1 game state, and the BB game state is provided (see FIG. 70 described later).

The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not the total number of medals paid out in the bonus game exceeds the specified number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, the operation of the BB, which is started when the stop display of the symbol combination related to the bonus combination related to the name "C_BB" is displayed, ends when the medals exceeding the specified number "90" are paid out.

That is, at the start of the bonus operation, the numerical value specified by the bonus operation time table is stored in the bonus end number counter, and thereafter, every time a medal is paid out through the bonus operation, the value of the bonus end number counter is set. It is subtracted. Then, the operation of the corresponding bonus ends on the condition that the value of the bonus end number counter is updated to less than "0".

The playable number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be played in the operation of the RB, that is, the so-called playable number of times. The winning count counter is data for managing the number of remaining games in which a combination of symbols related to winning can be displayed in one RB game, that is, the so-called winning count.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27. In the present embodiment, an internal lottery table is separately provided in each of the RT0 game state (general game state), the RT1 game state (BB flag state), and the BB game state.

Each internal lottery table has a winning number (internal winning combination), a lottery value when each winning number is determined, and a data pointer (small winning combination / replay data pointer) acquired when each winning number is determined. And the correspondence with the bonus data pointer). In the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, for convenience of explanation, the name of the internal winning combination corresponding to the winning number and the name of the drawing flag for production are also described.

In addition, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a preset bonus or small winning combination. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value (external random number value) extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) is set as a lottery value defined corresponding to each winning number. Subtract sequentially with. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur) at the predetermined winning number, it means that the winning number (internal winning combination) is won.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the winning number defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data pointer will be determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 performs various lottery processes related to the pseudo bonus (AT), and various lottery tables used for this lottery process (for example, a pseudo bonus lottery table, a reel lock lottery table, a mode or later described later). In the lottery table, etc.), the lottery value is defined not for each internal winning combination but for each effect lottery flag described in the internal lottery table of FIGS. 25 to 27. Therefore, when the lottery process is performed with reference to these lottery tables, the lottery process is performed based on the effect lottery flag corresponding to the internal winning combination. In the following, the production lottery flag with the name "fixed role" and the production lottery flag with the name "fixed cherry" are also collectively referred to as "fixed".

In addition, various effect lottery flags are stored in the main RAM 53. Then, when a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery, only the effect lottery flag corresponding to the predetermined internal winning combination is set to the ON state (data "1" is stored), and other effects. The lottery flag is set to the off state (data "0" is stored). For example, when the name "F_123B1" is internally won, only the production lottery flag of the name "normal role" is turned on.

(1) Internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state (general gaming state). The internal lottery table for the RT0 game state is referred to when the internal winning combination lottery process is executed for each unit game in the RT0 game state (general game state).

The RT0 gaming state internal lottery table defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "24" (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery values, and the data pointers that can be acquired.

For example, in the internal winning combination lottery process with reference to the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state, the probability that the winning number "2" (internal winning combination related to the name "F_BB") will be won is 4000/65536. Then, in this case, "0" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "1" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

Further, for example, in the internal winning combination lottery process with reference to the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state, the probability that the winning number "3" (the internal winning combination related to the name "F_replay") is won is 8978/65536. Will be. Then, in this case, "1" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

In the following, the internal winning roles corresponding to the production lottery flags of the names "cherry", "watermelon", "fixed role", "fixed cherry" and "middle che (middle cherry)" are collectively referred to as "rare role". ".

(2) Internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state (between BB flags) FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state (between BB flags). The internal lottery table for the RT1 game state is referred to when the internal winning combination lottery process is executed for each unit game in the RT1 game state (game state between BB flags).

The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "24" (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery values, and the data pointers that can be acquired.

For example, in the internal winning combination lottery process with reference to the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the RT1 game state, the probability that the winning number "2" (the internal winning combination related to the name "F_BB") is won is 0. Since the RT1 game state is the state between the BB flags, the BB combination is not won in the RT1 game state.

Further, for example, in the internal winning combination lottery process with reference to the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the RT1 game state, the probability that the winning number "3" (internal winning combination related to the name "F_replay") will be won is 12978/65536. Will be. That is, the winning probability of the replay combination in the RT1 gaming state (game state between BB flags) is higher than that in the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state). Then, in this case, "1" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

(3) Internal Lottery Table for BB Game State FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for the BB game state. The internal lottery table for the BB game state is referred to when the internal winning combination lottery process is executed for each unit game in the BB game state.

The internal lottery table for the BB game state defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "3" (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery value, and the data pointer that can be acquired.

In the BB game state, as shown in FIG. 27, any of the internal winning combinations of the names "loss", the names "F_RB combination 1" and "F_RB combination 2" is won. The internal winning combination (small combination / replay data "23") related to the name "F_RB combination 1" corresponds to all small combinations, and the internal winning combination (small combination / replay) related to the name "F_RB combination 2". The data "24") corresponds to the combination names "C_1 sheet 40", "C_1 sheet 1" to "C_1 sheet 47_2", and "C_control 1_1" to "C_control 3". That is, in the BB game state, the replay combination is not won.

[Design combination determination table]
Next, the symbol combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 36. The symbol combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointers associated with each internal winning combination and the symbol combinations (combinations) that can be displayed on the effective line (cross-down line). That is, when the small combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer (internal winning combination) are determined, the type of symbol combination that can be displayed on the valid line, that is, the type of display combination that can be won is uniquely determined. It is determined.

The various data described in the symbol combination (display combination) column in each symbol combination determination table is a symbol combination that allows display along the effective line set over the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. It is data for identification. The "data" in the symbol combination (display combination) column is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as the "data" in the display combination column in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 18 to 23. A unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit of. In addition, the circles described in the data pointer column in the symbol combination determination table are symbol combinations (combinations) that can be displayed on the effective line in the acquired data pointer (internal winning combination), that is, display combinations that can win a prize. Is shown.

In each symbol combination determination table shown in FIGS. 28 to 36, the symbol combination (display combination) related to the operation of the bonus is defined for the bonus data pointer "1", and the small combination / replay data pointer "1" is defined. -For each of "24", the symbol combination (display combination) related to the small combination and the replay combination is specified. That is, the symbol combination determination table has a correspondence relationship between the bonus data pointer and the display combination related to the operation of the bonus, and the display combination related to the small combination / replay data pointer and the payout of the medal or the display combination related to the operation of the replay. Prescribe the correspondence with.

For example, when "1" (internal winning combination of the name "F_BB") is acquired as a bonus data pointer, only the symbol combination related to the combination name "C_BB" is stopped as shown in FIGS. 28 to 36. It can be displayed. Further, for example, when "1" (internal winning combination of the name "F_replay") is acquired as a data pointer for a small combination / replay, the combination name "C_lip A1-1" is shown in FIGS. 28 to 36. "C_Rip E6_3" can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when "14" (internal winning combination of the name "F_common B1") is acquired as a data pointer for a small combination / replay, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 36, the combination name "C_7 sheets" is obtained. The symbol combinations related to "A" to "C_7 sheets E2_2", "C_control 2" and "C_control 3" can be stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the symbol combination determination table does not specify the case where the "internal winning combination" is "lost", but this is all the symbols defined by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 18 to 23. Indicates that the display of combinations is not allowed.

[Prize winning operation flag data table for symbols]
Next, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the data of the internal winning combination that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the effective line. That is, by referring to the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23).

For example, when the symbol "red 7" is stopped and displayed on the winning determination line of the left reel 3L, in the storage areas 1 to 33 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (red 7) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the displayable internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is logically producted and stored in the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73 described later) described later.

[Pseudo bonus lottery table]
Next, various pseudo-bonus lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. The pseudo-bonus lottery table is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery process (see FIG. 88 described later) is executed in the unit game in the normal game state.

In the present embodiment, in each setting (settings 1 to 6), a pseudo bonus lottery table is provided for each effect lottery state (mode). The pseudo-bonus lottery tables shown in FIGS. 38A to 38D are pseudo-bonus lottery tables that are referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively. Further, the pseudo-bonus lottery tables shown in FIGS. 39A to 39D are pseudo-bonus lottery tables that are referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7, respectively. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a separate pseudo-bonus lottery table is provided for each setting, but here, for simplification of the explanation, the pseudo-bonus lottery table referred to when the setting is the setting 1 is provided. Show only.

The pseudo-bonus lottery table defines the correspondence between various lottery triggers of the pseudo-bonus, the winning / non-winning lottery value of the pseudo-bonus set for each lottery trigger, and the pseudo-bonus type at the time of winning. In the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table of the present embodiment, the winning / non-winning of the AT (pseudo BB, pseudo RB) and the start timing of the AT (the game or the next game) are determined at the same time. There is. Further, in the pseudo-bonus lottery using the pseudo-bonus lottery table of the present embodiment, the winning / non-winning of AT (pseudo BB, pseudo RB), the type of AT (pseudo BB or pseudo RB), and the start timing of AT (pseudo BB or pseudo RB) The game or the next game) is determined at the same time.

In the present embodiment, the pseudo-bonus lottery trigger is when the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flags of the names "normal role", "watermelon", "cherry", "confirmed" and "middle che" wins internally. Or, when the number of digested games of the normal game reaches the number of games for which the pseudo-bonus is released (when the ceiling is reached). In addition, there are four types of winning of the pseudo bonus: "current game pseudo RB", "current game pseudo BB", "next game pseudo RB", and "next game pseudo BB".

In addition, when the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flag of the names "normal role", "watermelon", "cherry", "confirmed" or "middle che" wins internally, the pseudo bonus lottery is performed in the pseudo bonus lottery process. The lottery value in the corresponding effect lottery flag column in the table is referred to. Further, when the number of digested games of the normal game reaches the number of games for which the pseudo-bonus is released, the lottery value in the lottery trigger "ceiling" column in the pseudo-bonus lottery table is referred to in the pseudo-bonus lottery process.

For example, when the setting of the pachislot 1 is the setting 1, the effect lottery state is the mode 0, and the lottery trigger is the “normal role”, a pseudo bonus lottery table is used as shown in FIG. 38A. In the pseudo-bonus lottery, the pseudo-bonus type "current game pseudo-RB" is won with a probability of 189/65536, and the pseudo-bonus type "next game pseudo-RB" is won with a probability of 4/65536. Further, for example, when the setting of the pachislot 1 is the setting 1, the effect lottery state is the mode 0, and the lottery trigger is "watermelon", in the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table, 1230 With a probability of / 65536, the pseudo bonus type "next game pseudo RB" wins, and with a probability of 410/65536, the pseudo bonus type "next game pseudo BB" wins.

Further, for example, when the setting of the pachislot 1 is the setting 1, the effect lottery state is the mode 0, and the lottery trigger is "cherry", a pseudo bonus lottery table is used as shown in FIG. 38A. In the pseudo-bonus lottery, the pseudo-bonus type "next game pseudo-RB" is won with a probability of 656/65536. Further, for example, the setting of pachislot 1 is setting 1, the effect lottery state is mode 0, and the lottery trigger is "confirmed" (the effect lottery flag is "determined" or "confirmed cherry") or "medium". In the case of "Che", in the pseudo-bonus lottery using the pseudo-bonus lottery table, the pseudo-bonus type "next game pseudo-BB" is always won. Further, for example, when the setting of the pachislot 1 is the setting 1, the effect lottery state is the mode 0, and the lottery trigger is the “ceiling”, the pseudo bonus lottery using the pseudo bonus lottery table is always performed. , Pseudo bonus type "Current game pseudo RB" wins.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, when the setting of the pachislot machine 1 is the setting 1 and the lottery trigger is “fixed” (fixed combination or fixed cherry) or “middle che”. , Regardless of the type of production lottery state (mode), it is configured to always win the "next game pseudo BB". Further, when the setting of the pachislot machine 1 is the setting 1 and the lottery trigger is the "ceiling", the "current game pseudo RB" is always won in modes 0 to 3, and in modes 4 to 7, " One of the "current game pseudo RB" and the "current game pseudo BB" is configured to win.

In the present embodiment, the information regarding the start trigger (cancellation trigger) of the pseudo bonus is managed by using a flag called "effect winning trigger flag", and this effect winning trigger flag is used for each type of pseudo bonus lottery trigger. It is provided in. Specifically, as the production winning trigger flag, "normal role release flag", "watermelon release flag", "cherry release flag", "confirmation release flag", "middle-stage cherry release flag" and "game number release flag" Various flags are provided.

The normal combination release flag is a production winning opportunity flag that is set to the on state when the lottery trigger is "normal role" and the pseudo bonus is won, and the watermelon release flag is the watermelon release trigger when the lottery trigger is "watermelon". It is a production winning opportunity flag that is set to the on state when there is and a pseudo bonus is won. The cherry release flag is a production winning trigger flag that is set to the on state when the lottery trigger is "cherry" and the pseudo bonus is won, and the confirmation cancellation flag is the effect winning trigger flag that the lottery trigger is "confirmed (confirmed combination or). It is a production winning opportunity flag that is set to the on state when the pseudo bonus is won. In addition, the middle-tier cherry release flag is a production winning opportunity flag that is set to the on state when the lottery trigger is "middle che" and the pseudo bonus is won, and the number of games release flag is the effect winning trigger flag that the lottery trigger is ". It is a "ceiling" and is a production winning opportunity flag that is set to the on state when a pseudo bonus is won.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo-bonus type "next game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo BB" is won, the pseudo-bonus is started in the next game of the corresponding rattan game, and at this time, the above-mentioned long freeze (Freeze A or Freeze B) may occur. In the present embodiment, the information regarding the start trigger (cancellation trigger) of the pseudo bonus accompanied by this long freeze is managed by the effect winning trigger flag called the “long freeze cancellation flag”.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the pseudo BB stock lottery is won during the pseudo-bonus game period, the pseudo-BB is started in 1G series after the end of the pseudo-bonus of the current set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the information regarding the start trigger (cancellation trigger) of the pseudo bonus due to the release of the stocked pseudo BB is also managed by the effect winning trigger flag called the “pseudo BB stock release flag”. The various effect winning trigger flags described above are stored in the main RAM 53.

[Reel lock lottery table]
Next, various reel lock lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47. The reel lock lottery table is referred to in the reel lock lottery process (see FIG. 88 described later) performed when a pseudo bonus lottery is won in a unit game in a normal game state.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a reel lock lottery table is provided for each combination of the winning pseudo-bonus type and the mode (effect lottery state). The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40A to 40D and 41A to 41D are tables referred to when the bonus type "current game pseudo RB" is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40A to 40D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively, and the reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 41A to 41D are Each is a table referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7.

The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 42A to 42D and 43A to 43D are tables referred to when the bonus type "current game pseudo BB" is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 42A to 42D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively, and the reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 43A to 43D are Each is a table referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7.

The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44A to 44D and 45A to 45D are tables referred to when the bonus type "next game pseudo RB" is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 44A to 44D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively, and the reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 45A to 45D are Each is a table referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7.

Further, the reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 46A to 46D and 47A to 47D are tables referred to when the bonus type "next game pseudo BB" is won. The reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 46A to 46D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively, and the reel lock lottery tables shown in FIGS. 47A to 47D are Each is a table referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7.

The reel lock lottery table has various lottery triggers of the reel lock effect performed at the start of the pseudo bonus, the winning / non-winning lottery value of the reel lock effect set for each lottery trigger, and the reel lock type at the time of winning. Prescribe the correspondence with.

In the present embodiment, the lottery trigger for the reel lock effect is an internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flags of the names "normal role", "watermelon", "cherry", "confirmed", and "middle che". At that time, or when the number of digested games of the normal game reaches the number of games for which the pseudo bonus is released (when the ceiling is reached). The winning types of reel lock types are "short lock" (lock time 1000 msec), "freeze A" (lock time 30000 msec), "breeze B" (lock time 2000 msec), "short lock + freeze A" and "short". There are 5 types of "Rock + Freeze B".

In addition, when the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flag of the names "normal role", "watermelon", "cherry", "confirmed" or "middle che" wins internally, the reel lock lottery is performed in the reel lock lottery process. The lottery value in the corresponding effect lottery flag column in the table is referenced. Further, when the number of digested games of the normal game reaches the number of games for which the pseudo bonus is released, the lottery value in the lottery trigger "ceiling" column in the reel lock lottery table is referred to in the reel lock lottery process.

In the reel lock lottery process using the reel lock lottery table, as shown in FIGS. 40 to 47, the reel lock is mainly performed when the bonus winning type is "next game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo BB". The composition is such that the production wins. For example, when the bonus winning type is "next game pseudo BB", the effect lottery state is mode 1, and the lottery trigger is "middle check", as shown in FIG. 46B, 64/256 There is a probability that "Short Lock" will be won, and there is a probability of 32/256 that one of "Freeze A", "Freeze B", "Short Lock + Freeze A" and "Short Lock + Freeze B" will be won.

In this embodiment, the probability that the reel lock effect is won when the "current game pseudo RB" is won is 0 as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, and the reel lock effect is achieved when the "current game pseudo BB" is won. The probability of winning is also a very small value (almost no winning), as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43.

[Pseudo-bonus start mode transition lottery table]
Next, various pseudo-bonus start mode transition lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51. The mode transition lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus is referred to in the mode transition lottery process (see FIG. 89 described later) performed when the pseudo bonus lottery is won in the unit game in the normal game state.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo-bonus start mode transition lottery table is provided for each combination of the winning pseudo-bonus type, mode (effect lottery state), and setting. The various pseudo-bonus start mode transition lottery tables shown in FIGS. 48 to 51 are tables that are referred to when the setting is setting 1. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pseudo-bonus start mode transition lottery table is separately provided for each setting, but here, for the sake of simplicity, the setting is referred to when the setting is 1. Pseudo-bonus start mode transition mode transition Only the lottery table is shown.

The pseudo-bonus start mode transition lottery table shown in FIGS. 48A to 48D and FIGS. 49A to 49D is a table referred to in the mode transition lottery process performed at the start of the pseudo RB. Further, the pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery tables shown in FIGS. 48A to 48D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively, and the pseudo bonuses shown in FIGS. 49A to 49D. The start mode transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7, respectively.

Further, the pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table shown in FIGS. 50A to 50D and FIGS. 51A to 51D is a table referred to in the mode transition lottery process performed at the start of the pseudo BB. Further, the pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery tables shown in FIGS. 50A to 50D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively, and the pseudo bonuses shown in FIGS. 51A to 51D. The start mode transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7, respectively.

The mode transition lottery table at the start of the pseudo-bonus shows various lottery triggers for the mode transition lottery process performed at the start of the pseudo-bonus, and each effect lottery state (mode 0 to mode 7) of the transition destination set for each lottery trigger. Define the correspondence with the lottery value.

In the present embodiment, the lottery trigger of the mode transition lottery is the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flags of the names "normal role", "watermelon", "cherry", "confirmed" and "middle che". At that time, when the number of digested games of normal games reaches the number of games for canceling the pseudo bonus (when reaching the ceiling), or when the freeze is won by the reel lock lottery.

In addition, when the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flag of the names "normal role", "watermelon", "cherry", "confirmed" or "middle che" wins internally, a pseudo bonus starts in the mode transition lottery process. The lottery value in the corresponding effect lottery flag column in the time mode transition lottery table is referred to. When the number of digested games of the normal game reaches the number of games for which the pseudo bonus is released, the lottery value in the lottery trigger "ceiling" column in the mode transition lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus is referred to in the mode transition lottery process. Further, when the freeze is won in the reel lock lottery, the lottery value in the lottery trigger "FLZ" column in the mode transition lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus is referred to in the mode transition lottery process.

In the mode transition lottery process using the mode transition lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus, for example, at the start of the pseudo BB, the setting is setting 1, the effect lottery state is mode 4, and the lottery trigger is "cherry". In the case of, as shown in FIG. 51A, mode 0 is determined as the effect lottery state of the transition destination with a probability of 195/256, and mode 1 is determined as the effect lottery state of the transition destination with a probability of 26/256. Mode 2 is determined as the effect lottery state of the transition destination with a probability of 1/256. That is, in these cases, the effect lottery state is demoted.

Further, in the mode transition lottery process using the mode transition lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus, for example, at the start of the pseudo BB, the setting is setting 1, the effect lottery state is mode 4, and the lottery trigger is ". In the case of "cherry", as shown in FIG. 51A, mode 5 is determined as the transition destination effect lottery state with a probability of 32/256, and mode 6 is determined as the transition destination effect lottery state with a probability of 2/256. It is determined. That is, in these cases, the effect lottery state is promoted.

[Pseudo-bonus mode transition lottery table]
Next, various pseudo-bonus mode transition lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. The pseudo-bonus mode transition lottery table is referred to in the mode transition lottery process (see FIGS. 90 and 91 described later) performed when the pseudo-bonus stock lottery is won in the unit game during the pseudo-bonus game period. Will be done.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo-bonus medium mode transition lottery table is provided for each effect lottery state (mode). The pseudo-bonus medium mode transition lottery tables shown in FIGS. 52A to 52D are tables referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 0 to mode 3, respectively, and the pseudo bonus medium mode transitions shown in FIGS. 53A to 53D. The lottery table is a table that is referred to when the effect lottery state is mode 4 to mode 7, respectively. In the present embodiment, an example of using a common pseudo-bonus medium mode transition lottery table is shown regardless of the type of pseudo-bonus, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-bonus is separately for each type of pseudo-bonus. A medium mode transition lottery table may be provided.

The mode transition lottery table during the pseudo bonus is a lottery of various lottery triggers of the mode transition lottery process during the game period of the pseudo bonus and lottery of each effect lottery state (modes 0 to 7) of the transition destination set for each lottery trigger. Specify the correspondence with the value. In the present embodiment, the lottery trigger of the pseudo-bonus medium mode transition lottery is the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flags of the names "normal role", "watermelon", "cherry", "confirmation" and "middle che". It will be the time when the internal winning is done.

In the pseudo-bonus medium mode transition lottery table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the lottery value is appropriately set so that the effect lottery state (mode) is not demoted by the mode transition lottery process during the pseudo-bonus game period. It is set.

For example, when the current effect lottery state is mode 0 to 4, the lottery value is appropriately set for each type of lottery opportunity so that the transition to the effect lottery state of mode 5 or higher is determined. .. Further, when the current effect lottery state is mode 5, the lottery value is appropriately set for each type of lottery opportunity so that the transition to the effect lottery state of mode 5 or higher is determined. When the effect lottery state of is mode 6, a lottery value is appropriately set for each type of lottery trigger so that the transition to the effect lottery state of mode 6 or higher is determined. Further, when the current effect lottery state is mode 7, the lottery value is appropriately set so that the mode 7 is maintained as the effect lottery state regardless of the type of the lottery trigger.

[Mode transition lottery table when changing settings]
Next, the mode transition lottery table at the time of setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 54. The mode transition lottery table at the time of setting change is referred to in the effect lottery mode lottery process (see FIG. 83 described later) performed when the setting of the pachislot machine 1 is changed (when an operation to the setting change switch (not shown) is detected). To.

The mode transition lottery table at the time of setting change shows the lottery value of each changed setting (any of settings 1 to 6) and each effect lottery state (mode 0 to mode 7) of the transition destination specified for each setting. Prescribe the correspondence with.

In the mode transition lottery table at the time of setting change of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, a lottery value of 1 or more is defined for modes 0 to 3, and when the setting is changed, the effect lottery state is set to modes 0 to 0. It has a structure determined by any of 3. Specifically, in the present embodiment, mode 0 is determined as the effect lottery state with a probability of 128/256, and mode 1 is determined as the effect lottery state with a probability of 39/256, regardless of the changed setting type. Mode 2 is determined as the effect lottery state with a probability of 3/256, and mode 3 is determined as the effect lottery state with a probability of 86/256.

[Next pseudo bonus transition game number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the next pseudo-bonus transition game number lottery table will be described. The next pseudo-bonus transfer game number lottery table is referred to in the next pseudo-bonus transfer game number lottery process (see FIGS. 83, 89, 91 described later) for determining the number of pseudo-bonus release games (the number of ceiling games of normal games). Will be done.

The number of next pseudo-bonus transition games The lottery table shows each effect lottery state (any of modes 0 to 7) and the number of various next pseudo-bonus transfer games (number of pseudo-bonus release games) specified for each effect lottery state. The correspondence with the lottery value of is specified. The number of next pseudo-bonus transition games defined in the next pseudo-bonus transition game number lottery table of the present embodiment is three types of "31", "100 to 199", and "1199".

Next Pseudo Bonus Transition Game Number In the next pseudo bonus transition game number lottery using the lottery table, if the production lottery state is any of modes 0 to 2, as shown in FIG. 55, the next pseudo bonus transition game number. If "1199" is determined as the (number of pseudo-bonus release games) and the production lottery state is mode 3, "100 to 199" is determined as the next pseudo-bonus transition game number, and the production lottery state is mode 4. In the case of any of ~ 7, "31" is determined as the number of next pseudo bonus transition games. That is, in the present embodiment, the larger the mode value, the smaller the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games (number of ceiling games), and the higher the probability of winning the pseudo-bonus.

If "100 to 199" is determined as the number of next pseudo bonus transfer games in the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery using the next pseudo bonus transfer game number lottery table, the number of next pseudo bonus transfer games described later will be described. The number of next pseudo-bonus transition games (number of pseudo-bonus release games) is determined by referring to the table corresponding to the random value.

[Table of correspondence between the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games and random numbers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the correspondence table between the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games and the random number value will be described.

The table of correspondence between the number of next pseudo-bonus transfer games and the random number value is "100 to 199" as the number of next pseudo-bonus transfer games in the next pseudo-bonus transfer game number lottery process (see FIGS. 83, 89, and 91 described later). When is determined, it is referred to when determining the next pseudo-bonus transition game number (number of pseudo-bonus release games) based on the acquired random number value. At this time, as the random number value to be used, the random number value used in the next pseudo-bonus transition game number lottery may be used, or a new random number value (0 to 255) may be acquired.

The correspondence table between the number of next pseudo-bonus transfer games and the random number values defines the relationship between each random number value from 0 to 255 and the number of next pseudo-bonus transfer games (100 to 199) associated with each random number value. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the next pseudo bonus transfer games 199 to 100 are associated with the random numbers 0 to 99, respectively, and the next pseudo bonus transfer games 199 are associated with the random numbers 100 to 199, respectively. Correspond to ~ 100. Further, in the present embodiment, the next pseudo bonus transition games 199 to 144 are associated with the random numbers 200 to 255, respectively.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the effect lottery state is mode 3 (when "100 to 199" is determined as the next pseudo bonus transition game number), 144 to 199 is set as the next pseudo bonus transition game number. The probability of being decided is high. The correspondence between the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games and the random number value is not limited to this example, and can be set arbitrarily.

[Pseudo BB stock lottery table at the start of pseudo bonus]
Next, the pseudo BB stock lottery table at the start of various pseudo bonuses will be described with reference to FIGS. 57A and 57B. The pseudo BB stock lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus is referred to in the stock lottery process of the pseudo BB (1G series) performed in the start game of the pseudo bonus (see FIG. 90 described later). Note that FIG. 57A is a pseudo BB stock lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus referred to at the start of the pseudo RB, and FIG. 57B is a pseudo BB stock lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus referred to at the start of the pseudo BB.

At the start of the pseudo bonus, the pseudo BB stock lottery table shows the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the pseudo BB (1G series) and the lottery value set for each lottery result, and the effect lottery state (mode). ) Is specified for each type.

At the start of the pseudo RB, as shown in FIG. 57A, the pseudo BB (1G continuous) stock is won with a probability of 5/256 only when the effect lottery state is any of modes 5 to 7. Further, at the start of the pseudo BB, as shown in FIG. 57B, only when the effect lottery state is any of modes 5 to 7, the pseudo BB (1G series) stock is won with a probability of 32/256. That is, in the present embodiment, when the effect lottery state is any of modes 0 to 4, the pseudo BB (1 G series) stock lottery at the start of the pseudo bonus is not won.

[Pseudo BB stock lottery table during pseudo bonus]
Next, the pseudo BB stock lottery table in the pseudo bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 58. The pseudo BB stock lottery table during the pseudo bonus is referred to in the stock lottery process of the pseudo BB (1G series) performed in the unit game (including the start game of the pseudo bonus) during the game period of the pseudo bonus (see FIG. 90 described later). Will be done.

The pseudo BB stock lottery table in the pseudo bonus defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the pseudo BB (1G series) and the lottery value set for each lottery result for each lottery opportunity. .. In the present embodiment, the lottery trigger of the stock lottery process in the pseudo-bonus is the internal winning combination corresponding to the production lottery flags of the names "normal role", "watermelon", "cherry", "confirmation" and "middle che". Is the time when the inside wins.

In the present embodiment, for example, in the stock lottery processing during the game period of the pseudo bonus, when the lottery trigger is the "normal role", as shown in FIG. 58, the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) is won. do not do. In addition, for example, in the stock lottery process during the game period of the pseudo bonus, if the lottery trigger is "watermelon", there is a probability of 5/256 that the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) is won and the lottery trigger is drawn. If is "cherry", there is a 1/256 chance of winning a pseudo BB (1G series) stock lottery. Further, for example, in the stock lottery processing during the game period of the pseudo bonus, when the lottery trigger is "fixed" or "middle check", the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) is always won.

[Pseudo-bonus start stop production pattern lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62, various pseudo-bonus start / stop effect pattern lottery tables will be described. Pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern The lottery table is a reel effect lottery process (automatic stop pattern of a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo-bonus) executed when determining the reel stop effect pattern (automatic stop pattern of a specific symbol combination related to the pseudo-bonus) in the pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect. See FIG. 92 below).

Note that FIG. 59 is a pseudo bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table that is referred to when the pseudo RB starts and no freeze occurs at the pseudo RB start, and FIG. 60 shows the pseudo BB start time. It is a pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table that is referred to when there is and no freeze occurs at the start of the pseudo BB. Further, FIG. 61 is a pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table that is referred to when the pseudo BB start and the reel lock effect of “freeze A” occurs at the start of the pseudo BB. Is a pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table that is referred to when the pseudo BB start time and the reel lock effect of "freeze B" occurs at the pseudo BB start time.

Pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern The lottery table shows the correspondence between the reel stop effect pattern in the pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect and the lottery value set for each stop effect pattern for each effect lottery state (mode). Prescribed in.

As shown in FIGS. 59 to 62, in the present embodiment, 28 types (Patterns No. 0 to 27) of stop effect patterns are provided as reel stop effect patterns in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect at the start of the pseudo bonus. ..

Pattern No. The stop effect patterns 0 to 19 correspond to the above-mentioned normal stop pattern. For example, pattern No. The reel automatic stop operation of the stop effect pattern of 0 "normal rotation-> 123 stop-> stop position 2 (middle REG alignment)" is as follows. First, after the reel operation control of the reel stop preparation operation 2 is completed, the reel is normally rotated. After that, the left reel 3L is stopped on the first lap, the middle reel 3C is stopped on the second lap, and the right reel is stopped on the third lap. At this time, the symbol "Red 7" is stopped in the middle region of the left reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" is stopped in the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "BAR" is stopped in the middle region of the right reel 3R. To do. That is, a specific symbol combination ("Red 7"-"Red 7"-"BAR": REG alignment) related to the start of the pseudo RB is stopped and displayed on the center line. That is, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern of 0 corresponds to the normal stop pattern described with reference to FIG. 10A.

Also, for example, pattern No. The reel automatic stop operation of the stop effect pattern 5 “normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 7 (middle BIG alignment)” is as follows. First, after the reel operation control of the reel stop preparation operation 2 is completed, the reel is normally rotated. After that, the left reel 3L is stopped on the first lap, the middle reel 3C is stopped on the second lap, and the right reel is stopped on the third lap. At this time, the symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle region of the left reel 3L, the symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle region of the right reel 3R. Stop. That is, a specific symbol combination (“Red 7”-“Red 7”-“Red 7”: BIG alignment) related to the start of the pseudo BB is stopped and displayed on the center line. That is, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern of 5 corresponds to the normal stop pattern described with reference to FIG. 10B.

Pattern No. The 20 stop effect patterns “normal rotation → 3rd body long → stop position 7 (middle BIG alignment)” correspond to the long stop pattern described with reference to FIG. In addition, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern of 21 “normal rotation → 123 stop → stop position 2 (middle REG alignment) → restart left → stop position 6 (crossdown BIG alignment)” is the restop pattern (B after stop) described with reference to FIG. Corresponds to. Furthermore, the pattern No. 22 stop effect pattern "normal rotation-> 123 stop-> stop position 2 (middle REG alignment)-> restart right-> stop position 7 (middle BIG alignment)" is the re-stop pattern (A after stop) described in FIG. Correspond.

Pattern No. The stop effect pattern “normal rotation → shift stop → stop position 7 (middle BIG alignment)” of 23 corresponds to the high-speed stop pattern described with reference to FIG. In addition, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern “sway stop” of 24 corresponds to the sway stop pattern described with reference to FIG. Furthermore, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern “all stop” of 25 corresponds to the all-rotation simultaneous stop pattern (not shown) in which all reels are stopped at the same time after the reel operation control of the reel stop preparation operation 2 is completed.

Pattern No. The 26 stop effect pattern "long freeze A-> normal rotation-> 123 stop-> stop position 7 (middle BIG alignment)" is executed when "freeze A" or "short lock + freeze A" is won by the reel lock lottery. This is the stop pattern of the reel. In this stop effect pattern, the above-mentioned pattern No. A freeze of 30,000 msec occurs before the stop effect pattern of 5. In addition, the pattern No. The stop effect pattern of 27 "long freeze B-> normal rotation-> 123 stop-> stop position 7 (middle BIG alignment)" is executed when "freeze B" or "short lock + freeze B" is won by the reel lock lottery. This is the stop pattern of the reel. In this stop effect pattern, the above-mentioned pattern No. A freeze of 2000 msec occurs before the stop effect pattern of 5.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, when the pseudo-bonus starts and the freeze does not occur at the start of the pseudo-bonus, the larger the mode value, the more various stop effect patterns are displayed. May be chosen. For example, in the reel effect lottery process at the start of the pseudo BB and when the freeze does not occur at the start of the pseudo BB, as shown in FIG. 60, there is a probability of pattern No. 216/256. The stop effect pattern of 5 is won, and there is a probability of 6/256 that the pattern No. The stop effect pattern of 6 wins. Further, in the reel effect lottery process in this case, there is a probability of 2/256 that the pattern No. One of the stop effect patterns 7 to 9, 17 to 19, 23 and 24 wins, and there is a probability of 5/256 that the pattern No. The stop effect pattern of any of 15, 16 and 25 wins. Further, in the reel effect lottery process in this case, there is a probability of 1/256 that the pattern No. The stop effect pattern of any of 20 to 22 wins.

[Long weight lottery table at the start of pseudo bonus]
Next, a long weight lottery table at the start of various pseudo bonuses will be described with reference to FIGS. 63A to 63D. The long weight lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus is referred to in the long weight lottery process (see FIG. 90 described later) performed in the unit game at the start of the pseudo bonus.

FIG. 63A is a pseudo bonus start long weight lottery table that is referred to when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo RB is non-winning, and FIG. 63B is a pseudo BB start pseudo. It is a long weight lottery table at the start of a pseudo bonus which is referred to when the stock lottery of BB (1G series) is non-winning. Further, FIG. 63C is a pseudo bonus start long weight lottery table that is referred to when the pseudo BB (1G series) stock lottery at the start of the pseudo RB is the winning, and FIG. 63D is a pseudo BB start time. This is a long-weight lottery table at the start of the pseudo-bonus, which is referred to when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) is the winning.

The long weight lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) and the lottery value set for each lottery result.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63A to 63D, when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo bonus is non-winning, the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) is non-winning. It is configured to be. On the other hand, if the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo bonus is a winning, the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) will be won with a probability of 26/256.

[Long weight generation game lottery table]
Next, various long weight generation game lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67.

The long weight generation game lottery table is referred to in the long weight lottery process (see FIG. 90 described later) performed in the unit game at the start of the pseudo bonus. FIG. 64 is a long weight generation game lottery table referred to when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo RB is non-winning, and FIGS. 65A and 65B are at the start of the pseudo BB. This is a long weight generation game lottery table that is referred to when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) is non-winning. Further, FIG. 66 is a long weight generation game lottery table referred to when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo RB is the winning, and FIGS. 67A and 67B are at the start of the pseudo BB. This is a long weight generation game lottery table that is referred to when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) is the winning.

The long weight generation game lottery table defines the correspondence between the games in which the long weight effect (short lock) can be generated and the lottery value set for each game. In the long weight generation game lottery table for pseudo RB, games of the first to 20th games are defined as games in which long weight production (short lock) can be generated, and a long weight generation game lottery for pseudo BB is defined. At the table, the first to 70th games are defined as games in which a long weight effect (short lock) can be generated.

In the present embodiment, when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo bonus is non-winning, the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) is non-winning as described above. In the lottery process using the long weight generation game lottery table of FIGS. 64 and 65 referred to in the case, "no occurrence" is always won. On the other hand, if the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo bonus is the winning, a long weight effect (short lock generation) occurs, so that is referred to in this case in FIGS. 66 and 67. In the lottery process using the long weight generation game lottery table, the lottery results other than "no occurrence" are always won.

For example, when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo RB is a winning game, as shown in FIG. 66, there is a probability of 10/256 that the 2nd to 4th games are generated as a long weight effect. And any of the 17th to 20th games is selected, and any of the 5th, 6th, and 16th games is selected as a game in which a long weight effect is generated with a probability of 11/256, and a probability of 17/256. Any of the 7th to 15th games is selected as the game for generating the long weight effect. Further, for example, when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) at the start of the pseudo BB is a winning game, as shown in FIGS. 67A and 67B, as a game in which a long weight effect is generated with a probability of 2/256. Any of the 2nd to 10th games and the 61st to 70th games is selected, and there is a 4/256 chance that any of the 11th to 26th games and the 45th to 60th games will be used as the games for generating the long weight effect. It is selected, and one of the 27th to 44th games is selected as a game for generating a long weight effect with a probability of 5/256.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the lottery value of the first game is "0", and the long weight effect does not occur in the game of the first game.

[Long weight lottery table with pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a pseudo-bonus medium-long weight lottery table will be described. The long weight lottery table in the pseudo bonus is referred to in the long weight lottery process (see FIG. 91 described later) performed for each unit game during the game period of the pseudo bonus.

In the pseudo-bonus medium long weight lottery table, the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the long weight production (short lock occurrence) and the lottery value set for each lottery result is defined for each lottery opportunity. To do.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the long weight lottery in the pseudo bonus is performed when the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) in the pseudo bonus is won and the rare role is internally won. .. Then, the rare role (internal winning role corresponding to the production lottery flag of the names "watermelon", "cherry", "confirmed" or "middle che") is internally won, and the stock lottery of the pseudo BB (1G series) In the case of winning, the long weight effect (short lock occurrence) will be won with a probability of 32/256.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. Although description is omitted here, storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used in various reel effects (various game locks) and the like are also provided in the main RAM 53.

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area, and carry-over combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 69. In the present embodiment, each display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 to 33 represented by 1 byte of data.

When "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when it is stored) in each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 33, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the valid line. Show that. On the other hand, when all the bits are "0", it indicates that the symbol combination related to the winning is not displayed on the valid line.

Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with an internal winning combination storage area. The internal winning combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. 69. When "1" is set in a plurality of bits in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 3, the display of the symbol combination corresponding to each bit is permitted. Further, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "missing".

Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with a carry-over combination storage area. The carry-over combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area 1 shown in FIG. 69. However, bits 1 to 7 of the storage area are unused.

As a result of the internal lottery, when the internal winning combination corresponding to the symbol combination (display combination) of the name "C_BB" is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is a predetermined area in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination. It is stored in (the area of bit 0). The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination "Replay 3"-"Watermelon 1"-"Red 7" of the name "C_BB") is displayed on the valid line. It is retained without being cleared. Then, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is also stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery. That is, in the RT1 game state (between BB flags) in which the various games in the various effects game states described above are performed, the state in which "1" is stored in the bit 0 area of the internal winning combination storage area and the carry-over combination storage area is Be maintained.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 70. The game state flag storage area is composed of the game state flag storage area 1 represented by 1 byte of data. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus game state type or RT game state type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage area 1.

When "1" is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area 1, it indicates that a bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, BB is being operated to indicate the BB game state, and "1" is stored in bit 1 of the game state flag storage area 1. When is stored, the RB is being operated, indicating the RB gaming state. Further, for example, when "1" is stored in bit 2 of the game state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the game is being performed in the RT0 game state (general game state), and the game state flag storage area 1 When "1" is stored in bit 3, it indicates that the game is being performed in the RT1 game state (between BB flags state).

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 71. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 51 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 72. The press order storage area stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the symbol code storage area, for each effective line, the symbol code of the reel that has been stopped most recently (symbol code storage area 1 in the cross down line) and the displayable combination (symbol code storage area in the cross down line). 2-34) and are stored. After all reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage areas 2 to 134 in the cross-down line) in which the displayable combination is stored.

In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 37), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is logically producted with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically stacked data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 73.

[Push order flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the push order flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 74. In the present embodiment, the push order flag storage area is composed of push order flag storage areas 1 and 2, respectively represented by 1 byte of data. The correct pressing order of the stop button (type of internally winning pressing order bell) is assigned to each bit.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the push order flag storage areas 1 and 2, any of the push order bells (names "F_123B1" to "F_321B2") corresponding to the predetermined bit. (Internal winning combination), that is, it indicates that the internal winning combination related to the operation of the AT function has won. On the other hand, when all the bits are "0", it indicates that the push order bell did not win.

For example, when the name "F_123B1" is internally won, that is, when the correct pressing order of the stop button is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order flag storage area 1. .. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect game state is a pseudo bonus state and "1" is stored in a predetermined bit of the push order flag storage area, the correct answer of the stop button corresponding to the predetermined bit. The push order of is notified (push order navigation is executed). At this time, under the control of the main control circuit 41, the push order instruction display unit (not shown) provided on the pedestal portion 12 described above notifies the information regarding the correct push order of the stop button, and the sub control circuit 42 Push-order navigation using the lamp group 21 is also performed by control.

[Production game state storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the configuration of the effect game state storage area will be described. The effect game state storage area stores the effect game state flag consisting of 1 byte. In the effect game state flag, the corresponding effect game state is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the effect game state is the general game state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the effect game state storage area. Further, for example, when the production game state is in the notification waiting state, "1" is stored in bit 1 of the production game state storage area, and when the production game states are in the waiting state, the production game state is stored. "1" is stored in bit 2 of the area. Further, for example, when the effect game state is the pseudo RB state, "1" is stored in bit 3 of the effect game state storage area, and when the effect game state is the pseudo BB state, the effect game state is stored. "1" is stored in bit 4 of the area.

[Production lottery state storage area]
Next, the configuration of the effect lottery state storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 76. The effect lottery state storage area stores the effect lottery state flag consisting of 1 byte. In the effect lottery state flag, each bit is assigned a corresponding effect lottery state (any of modes 0 to 7). For example, when the effect lottery state is mode 2, "1" is stored in bit 2 of the effect lottery state storage area.

<Various names of internal winning combinations used to control the sub CPU>
In FIG. 77, the name of the internal winning combination managed on the sub control circuit 42 side (hereinafter referred to as “sub side”) (hereinafter referred to as “sub winning combination name”) and the main control circuit 41 side (hereinafter referred to as “main side”). ”) Shows the correspondence table with the above-mentioned name of the internal winning combination (hereinafter referred to as“ main winning combination name ”) managed in. In the correspondence table shown in FIG. 77, the correspondence relationship between the sub winning combination name managed on the sub side and the main winning combination name, the production lottery flag name, and the main small winning combination number managed on the main side is shown.

The effect lottery flag name is a flag name referred to in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus lottery table. Further, the main small winning combination winning number is information about the internal winning combination set in the start command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

The main winning combination names "Loss" and "F_BB" are referred to as sub-winning combination names "Loss" and "BB" on the sub side, respectively. In addition, "0" is associated with both the main winning combination name "missing" and the main small winning combination number of "F_BB". That is, the main small winning combination winning number "0" is associated with the sub winning combination names "loss" and "BB".

The main winning combination name "F_replay" is referred to as the sub winning combination name "replay" on the sub side. In addition, "1" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_replay". That is, the main small winning combination winning number "1" is associated with the sub winning combination name "replay".

The main winning combination names "F_123B1" to "F_321B1" are all referred to as sub-winning combination names "pushing order bell" on the sub side. In addition, "2" is associated with each of the main small winning combination winning numbers of the main winning combination names "F_123B1" to "F_321B1". That is, the main small winning combination winning number "2" is associated with the sub winning combination name "pushing order bell".

Both the main winning combination name "F_common B1" and "F_common B2" are referred to as the sub winning combination name "common bell" on the sub side. In addition, "3" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_common B1", and "4" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_common B2". It is associated. That is, the sub-winning combination name "common bell" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number "3" or "4".

The main winning combination name "F_special CH" is referred to as the sub winning combination name "cherry" on the sub side. In addition, "5" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_special CH". That is, the sub-winning combination name "cherry" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number "5".

Both the main winning combination name "F_special S1" and "F_special S2" are referred to as the sub winning combination name "watermelon" on the sub side. In addition, "6" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_special S1", and "7" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_special S2". It is associated. That is, the sub-winning combination name "watermelon" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number "6" or "7".

Both the main winning combination name "F_special SP1" and "F_special SP2" are referred to as the sub-winning combination name "fixed combination" on the sub side. In addition, "8" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_special SP1", and "9" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_special SP2". It is associated. That is, the main small winning combination winning number "8" or "9" is associated with the sub winning combination name "fixed combination".

The main winning combination name "F_special SP3" is referred to as the sub winning combination name "confirmed cherry" on the sub side. In addition, "10" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_special SP3". That is, the main small winning combination winning number "10" is associated with the sub winning combination name "fixed cherry".

The main winning combination name "F_special SPCH" is referred to as the sub winning combination name "middle cherry" on the sub side. In addition, "11" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_special SPCH". That is, the sub-winning combination name "middle-tier cherry" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number "11".

Further, both the main winning combination name "F_RB combination 1" and "F_RB combination 2" are referred to as the sub winning combination name "RB combination" on the sub side. In addition, "12" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_RB combination 1", and "13" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number of the main winning combination name "F_RB combination 2". It is associated. That is, the sub-winning combination name "RB combination" is associated with the main small winning combination winning number "12" or "13".

<Various names of sub-effect flags used in various production lottery processing on the sub side>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning / non-winning of the pseudo-bonus, that is, the winning / non-winning of the AT is determined by the main control circuit 41. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub-winning combination (sub-winning combination name) described with reference to FIG. 77 and the winning / failing of the AT are used as flags (hereinafter referred to as “sub-effecting flags”) used when the sub-side determines the effect content. Use a flag that combines and. The sub-effect flag indicates a specific example of the effect parameter according to the present invention.

FIG. 78 shows the correspondence between the main small winning combination winning number and AT winning type managed on the main side, the name of the sub-effect flag managed on the sub side, and the sub-effect flag number associated with each sub-effect flag. Shown. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, sub-effect flag numbers are separately provided for each type of game state (usually pseudo BB, pseudo RB). However, in this example, the correspondence between the sub-effect flag and the sub-effect flag number is the same regardless of the type of the game state (normal game, pseudo BB, pseudo RB), but the present invention is not limited to this. , The correspondence between the sub-effect flag and the sub-effect flag number may be changed for each type of game state (usually pseudo BB, pseudo RB).

The sub-effect flag of the name "Loss" is when the main small winning combination winning number is "0" (sub winning combination name "Loss" or "BB") and the AT (pseudo-bonus) is non-winning. This is a sub-effect flag set in a unit game (game). Then, "0" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "loss". Also, in the next game (pseudo-bonus notification game) of the game in which the next game pseudo BB or the next game pseudo RB wins, basically (the sub-effect flag of the name "watermelon, cherry + pseudo BB" described later is set. The sub-effect flag number "0" is set in the same manner as the sub-effect flag "miss".

The sub-effect flag of the name "Replay + Pseudo BB" has the main small winning combination winning number "1" (sub winning combination name "Replay"), and the current game pseudo BB or the next game pseudo BB wins in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag that is set in the game when the game is played. The sub-effect flag of the name "push order bell + pseudo BB" has the main small winning combination winning number "2" (sub winning winning combination name "pushing order bell"), and is the current game pseudo BB or the next game in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game when the pseudo BB wins. In addition, the sub-effect flag of the name "common bell + pseudo BB" has the main small winning combination winning number "3" or "4" (sub winning combination name "common bell"), and the current game is simulated in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game when the BB or the next game pseudo BB wins. Then, "1" is set as the sub-effect flag number for all of the sub-effect flags "replay + pseudo BB", "push order bell + pseudo BB", and "common bell + pseudo BB".

The sub-effect flag of the name "Replay + Pseudo RB" has the main small winning combination winning number "1" (sub winning combination name "Replay"), and the current game pseudo RB or the next game pseudo RB wins in the normal game. It is a sub-effect flag set in the game when you do. The sub-effect flag of the name "push order bell + pseudo RB" has the main small winning combination winning number "2" (sub winning winning combination name "pushing order bell"), and is the current game pseudo RB or the next game in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game when the pseudo RB wins. In addition, the sub-effect flag of the name "common bell + pseudo RB" has the main small winning combination winning number "3" or "4" (sub winning combination name "common bell"), and the current game pseudo in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in a unit game (game) when the RB or the next game pseudo RB wins. Then, "2" is set as the sub-effect flag number for all of the sub-effect flags "replay + pseudo RB", "push order bell + pseudo RB", and "common bell + pseudo RB".

The sub-effect flag of the name "Replay" is set in the game when the main small winning combination winning number is "1" (sub winning combination name "Replay") and the AT (pseudo-bonus) is non-winning. This is a sub-effect flag. Then, "3" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "replay".

The sub-effect flag of the name "push order bell" is when the main small winning combination winning number is "2" (sub winning combination name "pushing order bell") and the AT (pseudo bonus) is non-winning. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game. Then, "4" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "push order bell".

The sub-effect flag of the name "common bell" had the main small winning combination winning number "3" or "4" (sub winning combination name "common bell"), and the AT (pseudo bonus) was non-winning. It is a sub-effect flag set in the game of time. Then, "5" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "common bell".

The sub-effect flag of the name "watermelon" is when the main small winning combination winning number is "6" or "7" (sub winning combination name "watermelon") and the AT (pseudo bonus) is non-winning. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game. Then, "6" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "watermelon".

The sub-effect flag of the name "watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G series)" has the main small winning combination winning number "6" or "7" (sub winning combination name "watermelon"), and the next game in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game when the pseudo BB wins or when the pseudo bonus game wins the 1G series stock lottery. Then, "7" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G series)". In addition, in the next game (pseudo-bonus announcement game) of the game in which the sub-effect flag "watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G series)" is set, the sub-effect flag becomes "watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G series)". In this case, "7" is set as the sub-effect flag number, but when the sub-effect flag is a sub-effect flag other than "watermelon + pseudo BB (watermelon + 1G series)", "7" is set as the sub-effect flag number. 0 "is set.

The sub-effect flag of the name "watermelon + pseudo RB" has the main small winning combination winning number "6" or "7" (sub winning combination name "watermelon"), and the next game pseudo RB won in the normal game. It is a sub-effect flag set in the game of time. Then, "8" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "watermelon + pseudo RB".

The sub-effect flag of the name "cherry" is set in the game when the main small winning combination winning number is "5" (sub winning combination name "cherry") and the AT (pseudo bonus) is non-winning. This is a sub-effect flag. Then, "9" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "cherry".

The sub-effect flag of the name "Cherry + Pseudo BB (Cherry + 1G series)" has the main small winning combination winning number "5" (sub winning combination name "Cherry"), and the next game pseudo BB wins in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game when the player wins the 1G series stock lottery in the pseudo-bonus game. Then, "10" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "cherry + pseudo BB (cherry + 1G series)". In addition, in the next game (pseudo bonus announcement game) of the game in which the sub-effect flag "cherry + pseudo BB (cherry + 1G series)" is set, the sub-effect flag becomes "cherry + pseudo BB (cherry + 1G series)". In this case, "10" is set as the sub-effect flag number, but when the sub-effect flag is a sub-effect flag other than "cherry + pseudo BB (cherry + 1G series)", "10" is set as the sub-effect flag number. 0 "is set.

The sub-effect flag of the name "cherry + pseudo RB" is in the game when the main small winning combination winning number is "5" (sub winning combination name "cherry") and the next game pseudo RB wins in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag that is set. Then, "11" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "cherry + pseudo RB".

The sub-effect flag of the name "fixed role" had the main small winning combination winning number "8" or "9" (sub winning combination name "fixed winning combination"), and the AT (pseudo bonus) was non-winning. It is a sub-effect flag set in the game of time. Then, "12" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "fixed combination".

The sub-effect flag of the name "fixed role + pseudo BB (fixed role + 1G consecutive)" has the main small winning combination winning number "8" or "9" (sub winning combination name "fixed winning combination") and is a normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game when the next game pseudo BB wins or when the 1G series stock lottery is won in the pseudo bonus game. Then, "13" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "fixed combination + pseudo BB (fixed combination + 1G continuous)".

The sub-effect flag of the name "fixed role + pseudo RB" has the main small winning combination winning number "8" or "9" (sub winning combination name "fixed winning combination"), and the next game pseudo RB is in the normal game. It is a sub-effect flag set in the game when winning. Then, "14" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "fixed combination + pseudo RB".

The sub-effect flag of the name "confirmed cherry" is in the game when the main small winning combination winning number is "10" (sub winning combination name "confirmed cherry") and the AT (pseudo-bonus) is non-winning. This is a sub-effect flag that is set. Then, "15" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "confirmed cherry".

The sub-effect flag of the name "confirmed cherry + pseudo BB (confirmed cherry + 1G series)" has the main small winning combination winning number "10" (sub winning combination name "confirmed cherry"), and the next game is simulated in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game when the BB wins or when the 1G consecutive stock lottery is won in the pseudo-bonus game. Then, "16" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "confirmed cherry + pseudo BB (confirmed cherry + 1G series)".

The sub-effect flag of the name "fixed cherry + pseudo RB" is when the main small winning combination winning number is "10" (sub winning winning combination name "fixed cherry") and the next game pseudo RB wins in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game. Then, "17" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "confirmed cherry + pseudo RB".

The sub-effect flag of the name "middle-tier cherry" is in the game when the main small winning combination winning number is "11" (sub-winning role name "middle-tier cherry") and the AT (pseudo-bonus) is non-winning. This is a sub-effect flag that is set. Then, "18" is set as the sub-effect flag number for the sub-effect flag "middle-stage cherry".

The sub-directing flag of the name "Middle-tier cherry + pseudo BB (middle-tier cherry + 1G series)" has the main small winning combination winning number "11" (sub-winning role name "middle-tier cherry"), and the next game is simulated in the normal game. This is a sub-effect flag set in the game when the BB wins or when the 1G series stock lottery is won in the pseudo bonus game. Then, "19" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "middle-stage cherry + pseudo BB (middle-stage cherry + 1G series)".

In addition, the sub-effect flag of the name "middle-stage cherry + pseudo RB" has the main small winning combination winning number "11" (sub-winning role name "middle-stage cherry"), and the next game pseudo RB wins in the normal game. It is a sub-effect flag set in the game of time. Then, "20" is set as the sub-effect flag number in the sub-effect flag "middle-stage cherry + pseudo RB".

In addition, the determination of whether or not the AT (pseudo-bonus) is won (including the success or failure of the 1G series) performed on the sub side is the number of stocks of the pseudo-bonus included in the received start command (value of the production reservation counter). It is done based on. Specifically, on the sub side, it is determined whether or not the AT (pseudo bonus) has been won in the current game based on the difference between the stock number of the pseudo bonus in the current game and the stock number of the pseudo bonus in the previous game. Will be done. For example, if the stock number of the pseudo bonus in the current game is increased by "1" from the stock number of the pseudo bonus in the previous game, it is determined that the AT (pseudo bonus) has been won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only when the AT (pseudo-bonus) is won in the normal game, but also when the 1G consecutive stock lottery is won in the pseudo-bonus game, the AT (pseudo-bonus) is won on the sub side. Is determined.

Further, the determination of the winning AT (pseudo-bonus) type on the sub side is also performed based on the information regarding the AT (pseudo-bonus) type included in the received start command.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, which has a specification for determining the winning / non-winning of AT (pseudo-bonus) on the main side, as described above, the internal winning combination and the winning / failing of AT (pseudo-bonus) are combined on the sub-side. The sub-effect flag is generated, and the content of various effects controlled by the sub side is determined by using the sub-effect flag. By summarizing the winning combination of the internal winning combination and the winning / failing of the AT (pseudo-bonus) in this way, it is possible to reduce various processes such as subsequent production determination, and reduce the amount of data such as the data table associated with the lottery. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the above-described sub-effect flag generation process, the winning / non-winning of the AT (pseudo-bonus) can be determined on the sub side as well. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is only necessary to transmit the information indicating the state at the time of transmission of the command from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. In this case, the control load on the main side can also be reduced.

<Structure of production instruction command>
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of performing various reel effects (pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect, long weight effect, freeze, etc.) at the start of the game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the consistency between the reel effect controlled on the main side and the effect by various effect devices (display device 11, lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R, etc.) at the time of the reel effect controlled on the sub side ( In order to improve the corresponding accuracy), a command called "effect instruction command" is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 for each operation trigger in the reel effect. Then, the sub-control circuit 42 executes the corresponding effect for each trigger model based on the information (effect instruction parameter described later) regarding the trigger type of the reel effect included in the received effect instruction command.

[Basic configuration of various commands]
First, before explaining the data structure of the effect instruction command, the basic structure (basic format) of various command data transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 will be described in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a basic (overall) configuration of various command data transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. In the present embodiment, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 is composed of a command type unit in which command type information is stored and a parameter field unit in which various information related to games and effects are stored. Will be done.

The command type part is provided at the beginning of the command and is composed of 8 bits (1 byte).

The parameter field section is composed of five data storage areas referred to as "first parameter" to "fifth parameter". In the present embodiment, since the command transmission / reception operation is repeatedly performed in 8-bit units, the parameter field unit is also managed in 8-bit units, and each parameter is composed of an 8-bit (1 byte) data storage area. That is, the number of bytes (data amount) of the entire command is 6 bytes (48 bits).

In the present embodiment, an example in which the parameter field portion is composed of the first parameter to the fifth parameter, that is, an example in which the data length of the parameter field portion is a fixed length will be described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. .. Since the content of information included in the command and the amount of data differ depending on the type of command, the data length of the parameter field section may be variable for each type of command. For example, depending on the command type, the parameter field portion may be composed of the first parameter to the third parameter, or may be composed of only the first parameter. In this case, the amount of command data can be reduced to the minimum required amount.

[Data structure of production instruction command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the configuration of the effect instruction command and the contents of various information included in the command will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the bit-based configuration of the effect instruction command and the contents of various information stored in each bit. In this embodiment, the storage area for the fifth parameter of the effect instruction command is unused.

(1) Command type In the command type part of the effect instruction command, a value "21H" (hexary number: "00100001" in binary number) indicating the type of the effect instruction command is stored.

(2) First Parameter In the storage area of bits 0 (b0) to 4 (b4) of the first parameter of the effect instruction command, information corresponding to various operation triggers during reel effect (hereinafter, "effect instruction parameter"). ) Any one of "01H" to "10H" (hexary number) is stored. Further, the storage area of the first parameter bits 5 (b5) to 7 (b7) is unused.

The effect instruction parameter “01H” is data indicating the operation trigger “production game stop 7, 8 start”. The "production game stop 7" corresponds to the pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect in which the reel automatically stops in the shaking stop pattern described in FIG. 14, and the "production game stop 8" is the long described in FIG. Corresponds to the pseudo bonus start rotation effect that the reel automatically stops in the stop pattern. Then, the operation trigger "start of game stop 7 and 8 for effect" is data indicating the start of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the shaking stop pattern or the long stop pattern. Therefore, at the start of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the shaking stop pattern or the long stop pattern, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "01H" is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4 is the main control. It is transmitted from the circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter “02H” is data indicating the operation trigger “production game stop 7, 8 end”. The operation trigger "end of game stop 7 and 8 for effect" is data indicating the end of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the shaking stop pattern or the long stop pattern. Therefore, at the end of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the shaking stop pattern or the long stop pattern, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "02H" is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4 is the main control. It is transmitted from the circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter “03H” is data indicating the operation trigger “production game stop 5 (second half), 6 start”. The "production game stop 5" corresponds to the pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect in which the reel automatically stops in the re-stop pattern described in FIG. 13, and the "production game stop 6" corresponds to the high-speed operation described in FIG. Corresponds to the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect in which the reel automatically stops in the stop pattern. Then, the operation trigger "game stop 5 (second half), 6 start for production" is the start and re-rotation of the pseudo-bonus start rotation body production of the re-stop pattern (reel when changing "REG alignment" to "BIG alignment". (Re-movement operation), or data indicating the start of the pseudo-bonus start reel effect of the high-speed stop pattern. Therefore, at the start and re-rotation of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the re-stop pattern, or at the start of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the high-speed stop pattern, the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is stored. An effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter “03H” is set is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter “04H” is data indicating the operation trigger “production game stop 5, 6 end”. The operation trigger "end of game stop 5 and 6 for effect" is data indicating the end of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the re-stop pattern or the high-speed stop pattern. Therefore, at the end of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the restop pattern or the high-speed stop pattern, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "04H" is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is the main control. It is transmitted from the circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter “05H” is data indicating an operation trigger “pseudo-press”. The operation trigger "pseudo-press" is data indicating that the stop button is pseudo-pressed (not actually pressed by the player) during the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect). Therefore, at the timing when the stop button is pressed in a pseudo manner during the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation effect), the effect instruction parameter "05H" is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. The effect instruction command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. The effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "05H" is set is transmitted for each stop button (reel) that is pseudo-pressed.

The effect instruction parameter "06H" is data indicating an operation trigger "pseudo stop". The operation trigger "pseudo-stop" is data indicating that the reel has stopped in a pseudo manner in the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect). Therefore, when the reel is stopped in a pseudo manner during the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation effect), the effect instruction parameter "06H" is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. Is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

Further, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "06H" is set is transmitted for each reel that is pseudo-stopped. In the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the stop pattern other than the simultaneous stop pattern of all rotations, the reels are pseudo-stopped one by one, so the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "06H" is set is transmitted three times. .. On the other hand, in the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the simultaneous stop pattern for all reels, all reels are pseudo-stopped at the same time, so that the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "06H" is set is transmitted once.

The effect instruction parameter “07H” is data indicating the operation trigger “production game stop 2 start”. In addition, "game stop 2 for production" corresponds to the reel lock production of long freeze A or B. Then, the operation trigger "start of the game stop 2 for effect" is data indicating the start of the reel lock effect of the long freeze A or B. Therefore, at the start of the reel lock effect of the long freeze A or B, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "07H" is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4 is sub-controlled from the main control circuit 41. It is transmitted to the circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter “08H” is data indicating the operation trigger “effect game stop 2 end”. The operation trigger "end of game stop 2 for effect" is data indicating the end of the reel lock effect of long freeze A or B. Therefore, at the end of the reel lock effect of the long freeze A or B, the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "08H" is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4 is sub-controlled from the main control circuit 41. It is transmitted to the circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter "09H" is data indicating an operation trigger "production game stop 1 start". In addition, "game stop 1 for production" corresponds to a long weight production (short lock generation production). Then, the operation trigger "production game stop 1 start" is data indicating the start of a long weight effect (short lock generation effect). Therefore, at the start of the long weight effect (short lock generation effect), the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "09H" is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4 is subordinated from the main control circuit 41. It is transmitted to the control circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter "0AH" is data indicating the operation trigger "production game stop 1 end". The operation trigger "production game stop 1 end" is data indicating the end of the long weight effect (short lock generation effect). Therefore, at the end of the long weight effect (short lock generation effect), an effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "0AH" is set in the storage area of the first parameter bits 0 to 4 is subordinated from the main control circuit 41. It is transmitted to the control circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter “0BH” is data indicating the operation trigger “pseudo-rotation start”. The operation trigger "pseudo-rotation start" is data indicating that the pseudo-rotation of the reel is started after the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect) is started. Therefore, after the start of the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation effect), when the pseudo reel starts rotating, the effect instruction parameter "0BH" is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. A command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. In this embodiment, when the reel effect without short lock (pseudo-bonus start rotation effect) is executed, the reel rotation start command is issued before the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "0BH" is set. It is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter “0CH” is data indicating the operation trigger “production game stop 4 start”. The "game stop 4 for production" corresponds to the pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder production in which the reels are pseudo-stopped in the normal stop pattern ("REG alignment") at the start of the pseudo RB described with reference to FIG. 10A. Then, the operation trigger "start of the game stop 4 for effect" is data indicating the start of the pseudo bonus start rotation effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo RB). Therefore, at the start of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo RB), the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "0CH" is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is issued. It is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter “0 DH” is data indicating the operation trigger “effect game stop 4 end”. The operation trigger "production game stop 4 end" is data indicating the end of the pseudo bonus start rotation body effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo RB). Therefore, at the end of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo RB), the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "0DH" is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is issued. It is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter “0EH” is data indicating the operation trigger “production game stop 3 start”. It should be noted that the "production game stop 3" corresponds to the pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect in which the reels are pseudo-stopped in the normal stop pattern ("BIG alignment") at the start of the pseudo BB described with reference to FIG. 10B. Then, the operation trigger "production game stop 3 start" is data indicating the start of the pseudo bonus start rotation body effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB). Therefore, at the start of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB), the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "0EH" is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is issued. It is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter “0FH” is data indicating the operation trigger “production game stop 3 end”. The operation trigger "production game stop 3 end" is data indicating the end of the pseudo bonus start rotation body effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB). Therefore, at the end of the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the normal stop pattern (at the start of the pseudo BB), the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter "0FH" is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter is issued. It is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

The effect instruction parameter "10H" is data indicating the operation trigger "restart of rotation". The operation trigger "restart of rotation" is data indicating that the normal acceleration operation of the reel is started after the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect) is completed. Therefore, when the normal acceleration operation of the reel is started after the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation effect) is completed, the effect instruction parameter "10H" is set in the storage area of bits 0 to 4 of the first parameter. The effect instruction command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

(3) Second parameter In the second parameter of the effect instruction command, when "05H" is set as the effect instruction parameter in the first parameter (when the operation trigger is "pseudo press"), the pseudo press is performed. Information corresponding to the target reel of (hereinafter referred to as "pressing rotation cylinder") is stored. The pressed rotation cylinder data is stored in bits 0 (b0) to 2 (b2) of the second parameter of the effect instruction command. Further, the storage area of the second parameter bits 3 (b3) to 7 (b7) is unused.

The rotating cylinder pressing "001" is data indicating that the target reel for pseudo pressing is the left reel 3L, and the rotating cylinder pressing "010" is data indicating that the target reel for pseudo pressing is the middle reel 3C. Yes, "100" for pressing the rotating cylinder is data indicating that the target reel for pseudo pressing is the right reel 3R.

(4) Third parameter In the third parameter of the effect instruction command, when "05H" is set as the effect instruction parameter in the first parameter (when the operation trigger is "pseudo press"), the pseudo press is performed. Information corresponding to the symbol position of the reel (hereinafter referred to as "pressing position") is stored. Specifically, the information corresponding to any of the symbol positions "0" to "19" described with reference to FIG. 17 is stored in the third parameter as the data of the pressing position. The pressed position data is stored in bits 0 (b0) to 4 (b4) of the third parameter of the effect instruction command. Further, the storage area of the third parameter bits 5 (b5) to 7 (b7) is unused.

(5) Fourth parameter In the fourth parameter of the effect instruction command, when "05H" is set as the effect instruction parameter in the first parameter (when the operation trigger is "pseudo press"), the pseudo press is performed. Information corresponding to the planned stop position of the symbol on the reel (hereinafter referred to as "scheduled stop position") is stored. Specifically, the information corresponding to any of the symbol positions "0" to "19" described with reference to FIG. 17 is stored in the fourth parameter as the data of the scheduled stop position. The data of the position to be pressed is stored in bits 0 (b0) to 4 (b4) of the fourth parameter of the effect instruction command. Further, the storage area of bits 5 (b5) to 7 (b7) of the fourth parameter is unused.

As described above, when a production instruction command including information indicating the trigger is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 at various triggers during the reel production, the sub side corresponds to each trigger of the reel production. It is possible to reliably and accurately execute the produced effect. Further, as in the present embodiment, by subdividing the transmission timing of the effect instruction command during the reel effect, it is possible to correct the discrepancy between the reel effect controlled on the main side and various effects controlled on the sub side. it can.

In addition, by providing the above-mentioned effect instruction command transmission function, it is possible to perform an effect in which the output timing of the reel rotation start sound and the reel rotation start timing are shifted, for example, as in a long weight effect. You can perform various effects. As a result, the player's interest in reel production can be enhanced.

<Other characteristic functions>
Next, various other characteristic functions included in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

[Weight sound generation function]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the weight time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has not elapsed at the start of the game, a weight sound is generated. In addition, when the weight sound generation condition is satisfied even in the unit game in which "BIG alignment" or "REG alignment" is stopped and displayed in a pseudo manner and the pseudo bonus is started by the pseudo bonus start rotation effect (at the start of the previous game). When the weight time (4.1 sec) has not elapsed from the above), the weight sound is generated, and when the weight sound generation condition is not satisfied (when a long freeze occurs, etc.), the weight sound is not generated.

By providing such a weight sound generation function in the game in which the pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect is generated, the weight sound is generated in the pseudo-bonus notification game in which the pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect is generated as in the normal game. appear. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the state at the start of the pseudo-bonus notification game is locked, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect.

[Control function for lighting mode of stop button]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, each stop button is provided with a lighting lamp (not shown) indicating whether or not the player's operation with respect to the stop button is valid / invalid. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player's operation on the stop button is invalid, the stop button is lit in red by the lighting lamp (second notification mode), and the player's operation on the stop button is performed. When the operation is in the enabled state, the stop button is lit in blue by a lighting lamp (first notification mode). The lighting lamp provided on each stop button shows a specific example of the notification device according to the present invention.

The operation (switching) control of the lighting mode of the stop button is performed by the sub control circuit 42 (sub side). Specifically, when the sub-control circuit 42 receives the constant speed start command described later, the sub-control circuit 42 changes the lighting mode of all the stop buttons to blue lighting (effective lighting mode). Further, when the sub control circuit 42 receives the reel stop command described later, the sub control circuit 42 changes the lighting mode of the stop button corresponding to the target reel of the received reel stop command to red lighting (invalid lighting mode). Change. Even under the condition of blue lighting (effective lighting mode), when another operation (lever input, etc.) is detected, the sub-control circuit 42 sets the lighting mode of the stop button to blue lighting (effective lighting mode). Change from mode) to red lighting (invalid lighting mode).

By managing the lighting mode of each stop button in the sub control circuit 42 (sub side) as described above, the amount of processing and the amount of data in the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be reduced.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, even during the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect, the pseudo rotation start operation and stop operation of each reel, the pseudo stop operation (pseudo pressing) for each reel, etc. An effect instruction command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 at each opportunity. Then, in the present embodiment, even during the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect, the operation (switching) of the above-mentioned stop button lighting mode may be controlled when the effect instruction command is received.

For example, as the type of the effect instruction parameter, in addition to the type described with reference to FIG. 80, an effect instruction parameter indicating that the rotation speed of the reel has reached a specific speed (pseudo constant speed) after the start of the pseudo rotation of the reel is provided. Pseudo-bonus start When a production instruction command in which data associated with "pseudo constant speed" is set as an effect instruction parameter is received by the sub control circuit 42 (sub side) during the rotation body effect, the sub control The circuit 42 may change the lighting mode of all the stop buttons to blue lighting (effective lighting mode). Further, in this case, when an effect instruction command in which "pseudo press" (05H) is set as an effect instruction parameter is received by the sub control circuit 42 (sub side) during the pseudo bonus start rotation effect. The sub-control circuit 42 changes the lighting mode of the pseudo-pressed stop button to red lighting (invalid lighting mode).

As described above, the sub-control circuit 42 controls the lighting mode of each stop button during the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect (reel effect). That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 is a means (pseudo-notification control) for controlling the lighting mode (notification mode) of the stop button based on the effect instruction command received during the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect). It also serves as a means).

In this way, even during the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect (reel effect), the state at the start of the pseudo-bonus notification game is locked by performing the lighting effect of each stop button as in the normal time. It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the above, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect. It should be noted that the constant speed (pseudo constant speed) of the reel during the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect may be the same as or different from that at the normal time.

[Demo migration management function]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is in a non-gaming state from the end of paying out the medals to the insertion of medals (including automatic insertion) in the next game. In the present embodiment, the duration of this non-gaming state is monitored, and if the non-gaming state continues for a predetermined period, a demonstration (hereinafter, simply referred to as "demo") and / or a state of the power saving mode is set. Set. In this case, for example, the seg is turned off and the demo image is displayed.

Then, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the duration of the non-gaming state is monitored independently on the main side and the sub side, respectively. Specifically, timers for monitoring the duration of the non-game state are provided separately on each of the main side and the sub side. Then, both timers are set so that the monitoring start timing of the duration of the non-gaming state on the main side and the determination timing of the demo transition and those on the sub side substantially match. Therefore, when the state shifts to the demo and / or power saving mode state in the present embodiment, the demo and / or power saving mode state (non-game) is performed by the main control circuit 41 (main side). The specific processing (for various power saving processes, etc.) of the state (for the state) is performed by the sub control circuit 42 (sub side), and the specific processing for the state of the demo and / or the power saving mode (for the non-gaming state) is performed. It starts at almost the same timing as the production process (display process of demo image, etc.).

The following effects can be obtained by providing the non-gaming state monitoring function of the present embodiment described above. In a general pachislot machine, a command called a "demo command" is transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub control circuit when starting the demo and / or power saving mode state. Then, the sub-control circuit performs the effect control for the demo and / or the power saving mode state, triggered by the reception of the demo command.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the duration of the non-game state is monitored independently on each of the main side and the sub side, it is not necessary to provide a demo command. In this case, effects such as reduction of command types and reduction of processing load in the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be obtained.

[Count function for the number of medals paid out]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function (payout sound output function) of outputting a payout sound for notifying the medal payout process from the speakers 20L and 20R during the medal payout process. The operation of this payout sound output function is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, one medal is paid out and a payout sound is produced each time a command called "credit information command" indicating the trigger of the medal payout operation is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. appear. Therefore, at the time of winning a small winning combination, the number of times the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the small winning combination and the credit information command (payment execution data) are transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and a payout sound is generated. That is, the credit information command is continuously transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 at the payout operation interval of one medal as many times as the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning small winning combination, and the payout sound. Occurs.

At this time, the sub-control circuit 42 counts the number of times the credit information command is continuously received, and when the number of times the credit information command is received reaches the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning small winning combination, the payout sound is produced. Output control of is stopped. That is, the sub-control circuit 42 determines the timing of the end of the medal payout operation based on the number of times the credit information command is received, and controls the stop of the payout sound.

By providing the above-mentioned function for counting the number of medals to be paid out, the following effects can be obtained. In a general pachislot, during the payout of medals, not only the credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 each time one medal is paid out, but also the medals are paid out, as in the present embodiment. At the end of the payout operation, a command indicating the end of the medal payout operation, for example, a command called "payout end command" is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. Then, on the sub side, upon receiving this payout end command, the timing of the end of the medal payout operation is determined, and the output stop processing of the payout sound is performed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 determines the timing of the end of the medal payout operation based on the number of times the credit information command is received, and performs the payout sound output stop processing, so that the payout end command is issued. There is no need to provide it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the medal is being paid out without using the payout end command. Further, in this case, effects such as reduction of command types and reduction of processing load in the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the result of the function of counting the number of times the credit information command is received is used in the determination control of the output end processing of the payout sound has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is necessary to switch the effect processing when the medal payout ends, the result of the count function of the number of times the credit information command is received can be used for any processing. For example, the result of the count function of the number of times the credit information command is received may be used for the processing of the video switching control at the end of paying out the medals.

Further, although not shown, the credit information command includes information on the number of payouts, and the information on the number of payouts is obtained every time the credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 (one medal). Every time it is paid out), "1" is subtracted. That is, the information on the number of payouts included in the credit information command is the remaining number of payouts.

In the present embodiment, even if the winning combination is a combination in which medals such as loss and replay are not paid out, a credit information command including information that the number of payouts is 0 is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. It shall be configured to be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a credit information command may be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 only when a small winning combination is won.

[Medal settlement function]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the settlement button and the medal settlement (payment) process is started, the speaker 20L provides a settlement sound to notify the medal during the medal settlement process. It has a function to output from 20R (payment sound output function). The operation of this settlement sound output function is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the settlement button, the main control circuit is a command called "payment sound command" that indicates the trigger for starting the settlement process of the stored (credit) medals. It is transmitted from 41 to the sub-control circuit 42. The sub-control circuit 42 sets the game state to the settlement in progress state, triggered by the reception of the settlement sound command (settlement start data). Then, during the medal settlement process, every time one medal is settled (paid out), a credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and a settlement sound is generated. That is, during the medal settlement process, the credit information command is continuously sent from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 at the settlement (payout) operation interval of one medal as many times as the number of credits of the medal. It is transmitted and a settlement sound is generated.

The credit information command includes not only the information on the number of medals to be paid out (the number of remaining medals to be paid out) but also the information on the number of medals currently being credited (the number of credits). Then, during the medal settlement process, the number of credits is deducted by "1" each time a credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 (every time one medal is paid out).

Therefore, when the sub-control circuit 42 receives the credit information command, if the current state is in the settlement state and the information on the number of credits included in the credit information command is "1" or more, the settlement sound is output. (Request) Control. Then, the sub-control circuit 42 completes the settlement (payment) of all the credited medals when the information on the number of credits included in the received credit information command becomes "0" in the settlement in progress state. If so, the settlement process is stopped. Specifically, the sub-control circuit 42 releases the settlement in progress state and performs the settlement sound output stop processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a state in which the settlement sound continues to sound due to a power failure or the like, the current state is the settlement in progress state, the number of credits is 0, and the number of credits is 0 at the time of receiving the no-operation command. When the settlement sound is being output, the sub-control circuit 42 performs the output stop processing of the settlement sound.

The non-operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 when there is no transmission data (for example, various commands such as a start command, a reel stop command, and a display command described later) related to operations essential to the game. The command to be done. Although not shown, the non-operation command includes information on invalid operations such as lever operation, BET operation (operation of pressing the MAX bet button 14 by the player), and ON / OFF operation of the stop button when the command is not enabled. included.

By providing the above-mentioned medal settlement function (settlement end function), the following effects can be obtained. In a general pachislot machine, during the settlement of medals, not only the credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 each time one medal is settled, as in the present embodiment. At the end of the medal settlement operation, a payout end command indicating the end of the medal payout (payment) operation is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. Then, on the sub side, upon receiving this payout end command, the timing of the end of the medal settlement operation is determined, and the output stop control of the settlement sound is performed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 determines the timing of the end of the medal settlement (payout) operation based on the presence / absence of the settlement in progress state and the information on the number of credits included in the credit information command. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to control the output stop of the settlement sound without using the payout end command. Further, in this case, effects such as reduction of command types and reduction of processing load in the main control circuit 41 (main side) can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the result of the medal settlement function (settlement end function) is used in the determination control of the output end process of the settlement sound has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is necessary to switch the effect processing when the medal settlement is completed, the result of the medal settlement function can be used for any processing. For example, the result of the medal settlement function may be used for processing of video switching control at the end of settlement.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 109, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 by using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 81 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this process, various initialization processes at the time of setting change, determination process of whether or not backup is performed normally, and the like are performed. The details of the initialization process at the time of turning on the power will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area that requires data to be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, a medal sensor (not shown), an input check process of the start switch 16S, a demo transition determination process, and the like are performed. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an acquisition process of a random number value for the internal winning combination lottery (S4). In this process, the main CPU 51 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect random value acquisition process (S5). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires various effect random values for determining the contents related to the operation of, for example, the AT (pseudo-bonus) function, the reel lock function, the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect, and the like. Specifically, the main CPU 51 has a random value for production (0 to 65535) for pseudo-bonus lottery, a random value for production (0 to 255) for pseudo-BB stock lottery, and a production for the next pseudo-bonus transition game number lottery. Random value for production (0 to 255), random value for production for reel lock lottery (0 to 255), random value for production for reel stop production pattern lottery (0 to 255), random value for production for mode transition lottery (0 to 255), a random value (0 to 255) for producing a long weight lottery, and the like are acquired.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value for the internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lottery process when the lever is turned on (S7). In this process, based on the random values for various effects extracted in S5 and the internal winning combination determined in S6, the operation contents such as the AT (pseudo-bonus) function, the reel lock function, and the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect are related. Various lottery processes are performed. The details of the lottery process when the lever is turned on will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S8). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a start command generation / storage process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data for a start command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. In addition, the start command data includes internal winning combination (main small winning combination winning number), presence / absence of pseudo-bonus winning (value of production reservation counter), presence / absence of reel lock, presence / absence of pseudo-bonus start rotation production, and notification lamp. Information on various lottery results such as lighting instructions is included.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a game weight digestion process, a request process for starting rotation of all reels, a reel lock process, a reel control process for producing a pseudo bonus start rotation, and the like.

In the weight digestion process in S10, if the predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous unit game, the main CPU 51 waits until the predetermined weight time elapses. Digest time. Next, if it is not decided to perform reel lock or pseudo-bonus start rotation effect at the start of the game, normal acceleration processing is performed on the three reels.

Specifically, after the predetermined weight time is exhausted, the main CPU 51 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 109 described later), which is executed at a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec). Is controlled, and rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained.

On the other hand, when it is decided to perform a reel effect such as a reel lock or a pseudo-bonus start rotation effect at the start of the game, the main CPU 51 performs the above-mentioned normal acceleration process of the reel in the process of S10. , Set the data such as the determined reel lock and the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect, and perform those reel effects. The details of the reel rotation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning search process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 51 uses the symbol combination displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23). And collate with. Then, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a display command generation / storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data for display commands to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The display command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. By this processing, the sub-control circuit 42 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the effective line, and can determine the execution timing and the like of various effects.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs the effect processing after the third stop (S15). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a pseudo bonus END lock execution process at the end of the pseudo bonus, an effect game state update process at the end of the pseudo bonus, and the like. The details of the third stop effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 105 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal payout process (S16). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S13, and the medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the display combination, but as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23), the maximum number of medals to be paid out (upper limit of payout) is 7. Become.

Further, in the process of S16, when the settlement button is pressed by the player, the number of credit medals is paid out (settlement). Further, in this process, a set process of the main demo transition timer for counting the duration of the non-gaming state is also performed. The details of the medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106 described later. Further, the main demo transition timer shows a specific example of the first monitoring means according to the present invention.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end check process (S17). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game by referring to various counters (not shown) for managing the end timing of the bonus (BB) game provided in the main RAM 53. To do. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus operation check process (S18). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus (BB) game and whether or not to replay the game. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later. Then, when the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Initialization process when power is turned on]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the initialization process at the time of power-on performed in S1 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the setting change switch (not shown) is in the ON state (S31).

In S31, when the main CPU 51 determines that the setting change switch is in the ON state (when the determination in S31 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the setting change process (S32). The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later. Then, after the processing of S32, the main CPU 51 ends the initialization processing at the time of turning on the power, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

On the other hand, in S31, when the main CPU 51 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (when the determination in S31 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the power failure recovery process (S33). The details of the power failure recovery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later. Then, after the processing of S33, the main CPU 51 ends the initialization processing at the time of turning on the power, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the setting change process performed in S32 during the initialization process (see FIG. 82) at the time of turning on the power will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process of the number of pseudo-bonus release games (the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games) (S41). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets a value of "65535" to the number of pseudo-bonus release games.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs the effect lottery mode lottery process (S42). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the mode transition lottery table at the time of setting change (see FIG. 54) based on the changed settings (settings 1 to 6), and determines the effect lottery state (mode).

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the lottery result (any of modes 0 to 7) of the effect lottery mode lottery process (S43). Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores "1" in a bit in the effect lottery state storage area (see FIG. 76) corresponding to the lottery result (any of modes 0 to 7).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs the next pseudo-bonus transition game number lottery process (S44). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the next pseudo-bonus shift game number lottery table (see FIG. 55) based on the set effect lottery state (mode), and determines the number of next pseudo-bonus shift games. In this process, when mode 3 is set, "100 to 199" is determined as the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games, but in this case, the main CPU 51 further sets the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games. With reference to the table corresponding to the random value (see FIG. 56), the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games corresponding to the random value is determined.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the lottery result (the number of next pseudo-bonus transfer games) of the next pseudo-bonus transfer game number lottery process to the number of pseudo-bonus release games (S45). Then, after the process of S45, the main CPU 51 ends the setting change process and also ends the initialization process (see FIG. 82) at the time of turning on the power.

[Power failure recovery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the power failure recovery process performed in S33 during the initialization process (see FIG. 82) at the time of turning on the power will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S51). In this determination process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the backup is normal by performing error detection using the checksum value.

In S51, when the main CPU 51 determines that the backup is normal (when the determination in S51 is YES), the main CPU 51 returns the set value to the state before the power failure based on the backup data (S52). Then, after the process of S52, the main CPU 51 ends the power failure recovery process and also the initialization process at the time of turning on the power (see FIG. 82).

On the other hand, in S51, when the main CPU 51 determines that the backup is not normal (when the determination in S51 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs power-on error processing (S53). In this process, the main CPU 51 notifies that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic closing request (S61). The presence or absence of this automatic closing request is performed by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request.

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the re-game has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

In S61, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic closing request (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the automatic closing process (S62). In this process, the value of the automatic input counter is copied to the input number counter, and then the value of the automatic input counter is cleared.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S63). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. The medal insertion command includes parameters for specifying the number of medals inserted, but the medal insertion command generated in S63 includes the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game (the number of medals that can be started). Information is set. Then, after the processing of S63, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S73 described later.

On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 51 permits the acceptance of medals (S64). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper 33.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted medals according to the gaming state (S65). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted medals to "3".

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S66). When it is determined in S66 that the main CPU 51 is not permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S66 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S73 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S66 that the main CPU 51 is permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S66 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion check process (S67). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medals have been inserted, and adds "1" to the inserted number counter when the medals are inserted.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted based on the result of the check process in S67 (S68).

In S68, when the main CPU 51 determines that no medals have been inserted (when the determination in S68 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S71 described later.

On the other hand, in S68, when the main CPU 51 determines that a medal has been inserted (when the determination in S68 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S69). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S70). In this embodiment, the number of games that can be started is "3".

In S70, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S70 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S73 described later.

On the other hand, in S70, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when S70 determines NO), or when S68 determines NO, the main CPU 51 sets the main demo transition timer to "0". It is determined whether or not it is (S71). The main demo transition timer setting process is performed by the medal payout process (see FIG. 106 described later) described later.

In S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the main demo transition timer is not "0" (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S66 and repeats the processes after S66.

On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the main demo transition timer is "0" (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the main demo flag to the ON state (S72). By this process, the process at the time of demo migration is started. The main demo flag is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the demo and / or power saving mode state, and is stored in the main RAM 53. Then, after the processing of S72, the main CPU 51 returns the processing to S66 and repeats the processing after S66.

Here, returning to the processing of S63, S66 and S70 again, after the processing of S63, if S66 determines NO or if S70 determines YES, the main CPU 51 sets the main demo flag to the off state ( S73). If the state of the game is not in the demo and / or power saving mode at the time of this process, this process performs a process of keeping the main demo flag off. On the other hand, at the time of this process, if the game state is in the demo and / or power saving mode, this process is a process of updating the main demo flag from the on state to the off state. The demo and / or power saving mode state ends.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S74). In S74, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is not on (when the determination in S74 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S66 and repeats the processes after S66.

On the other hand, in S74, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is ON (when the determination in S74 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S75). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 18. When this process is completed, the main CPU 51 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and shifts the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

As described above, the process (S71) of determining whether or not the main demo transition timer during the medal acceptance / start check process of the present embodiment is “0” is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 is a means for determining whether or not to perform processing in the demo and / or power saving mode state (non-gaming state) based on the monitoring result by the main demo transition timer. Also serves as (first non-gaming state determination means).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state (S81). In this process, the main CPU 51 grasps the current game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 70), and uses the type of internal lottery table (internal lottery table according to any one of FIGS. 25 to 27). To determine.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a random number value for internal lottery stored in the random number value storage area (S82). Then, the main CPU 51 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value for the internal lottery (S83).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result (subtraction result) in S83 is less than "0" (negative value) (S84). In S84, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is less than "0" (when the determination in S84 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S87 described later.

On the other hand, in S84, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is not less than "0" (when the determination in S84 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S85). Specifically, the value of the calculation result (subtraction result) is set as a random value, and the winning number is added by "1".

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S86). When it is determined in S86 that the main CPU 51 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S86 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S83 and repeats the processes after S83.

On the other hand, in S86, when it is determined that the main CPU 51 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S86 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S88 described later.

Here, returning to the processing of S84 again, if S84 is a YES determination (when a digit is generated in the subtraction processing), the main CPU 51 is a small winning combination / replay data pointer corresponding to the winning number in which the digit is generated. And the bonus data pointer is acquired (S87).

After the processing of S87 or when the determination of S86 is YES, the main CPU 51 refers to the symbol combination determination table (see FIGS. 28 to 36), and based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer, the internal winning combination (display that can win a prize). The combination) is acquired (S88). Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination (display combination that can win a prize) in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 69) (S89).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (S90). In S90, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not "00000000000" (when the determination in S90 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S95 described later.

On the other hand, in S90, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (when the determination in S90 is YES), the main CPU 51 uses the symbol combination determination table (FIGS. 28 to 28 to). Refer to FIG. 36) to acquire the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer (S91).

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S92).

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the carry-over combination storage area and determines whether or not the BB is carrying over (S93). In S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB is not carrying over (when the determination in S93 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S95 described later.

On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB is carrying over (when the determination in S93 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the RT1 gaming state as the gaming state (S94). Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores (sets) "1" in bit 2 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 70).

After the processing of S94, or when S90 or S93 determines NO, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S95). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

As described above, the internal lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for executing the determination process of the internal winning combination (internal winning combination determining means).

[Lottery processing when lever is on]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the lottery process at the time of lever-on performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 performs an effect lottery flag generation process (S101). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the effect lottery flag corresponding to the internal winning combination to the on state, and sets the other effect lottery flags to the off state. For example, when the internal winning combination of the name "F_123B1" is won, the main CPU 51 sets only the effect lottery flag of the name "normal combination" to the ON state (see FIGS. 25 and 26). Further, for example, even when the internal winning combination of the name "F_replay" is won, the main CPU 51 sets only the effect lottery flag of the name "normal combination" to the ON state.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the BB gaming state (S102).

In S102, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is the BB gaming state (when the determination in S102 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the lottery process at the time of lever-on, and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move to S8. On the other hand, in S102, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is not the BB gaming state (when the determination in S102 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the directed gaming state is in the notification waiting state (S103). ).

In S103, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the notification waiting state (when the determination in S103 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S105 described later. On the other hand, in S103, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is in the notification waiting state (when the determination in S103 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the effect game state in the waiting state (S104).

After the processing of S104 or when the determination in S103 is NO, the main CPU 51 normally performs the lottery processing (S105). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a pseudo bonus lottery (release lottery) and a reel lock lottery. The details of the normal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a mode transition lottery process (S106). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a mode (effect lottery state) transition lottery at the start of the pseudo bonus and a lottery for the number of next pseudo bonus transition games. The details of the mode transition lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a stock lottery process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs a stock lottery of a pseudo BB (1G series) and a lottery of a long weight effect. The details of the stock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect lottery process (S108). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly draws the reel stop effect pattern of the pseudo bonus start rotation effect that is performed at the start of the pseudo bonus. The details of the reel effect lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. Then, after the processing of S108, the main CPU 51 ends the lottery processing when the lever is turned on, and shifts the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Normal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the normal medium lottery process performed in S105 in the flowchart of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the normal game state (S111).

In S111, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the normal gaming state (when the determination in S111 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the normal lottery process and performs the process by the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). ) S106. On the other hand, in S111, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the normal game state (when the determination in S111 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of pseudo-bonus release games is "0". (Whether or not the current game is a game when the ceiling is established) is determined (S112).

In S112, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of pseudo-bonus release games is "0" (when the determination in S112 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the game number release flag to the ON state (S113). At this time, the main CPU 51 sets the other effect winning trigger flags to the off state. On the other hand, in S112, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of pseudo-bonus release games is not "0" (when the determination in S112 is NO), the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the number of pseudo-bonus release games (S114). ..

After the processing of S113 or S114, the main CPU 51 performs a pseudo bonus lottery processing (S115). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery table (see FIGS. 38 and 39, etc.), and based on the current effect lottery state (mode), setting, effect lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the like. Pseudo-bonus winning / non-winning, pseudo-bonus type and notification timing at the time of winning (pseudo-bonus type "current game pseudo RB", "current game pseudo BB", "next game pseudo BB" and "next game times pseudo" described above BB ”) is determined.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the lottery result of the pseudo-bonus lottery process (S116). When the pseudo-bonus lottery is won, in this process, a set process of the winning pseudo-bonus type and an update process (1 addition) of the value of the effect reservation counter are performed. Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus has been won (S117).

In S117, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus has not been won (when the determination in S117 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the normal lottery process and performs the process by the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Move to S106. On the other hand, in S117, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus has been won (when the determination in S117 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the game number release flag is on (S118).

In S118, when the main CPU 51 determines that the game number release flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S118 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S120 described later. On the other hand, in S118, when the main CPU 51 determines that the game number release flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S118 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the effect winning trigger flag (S119). In this process, the effect winning opportunity flag corresponding to the pseudo-bonus winning opportunity (other than canceling the number of games) is set to the on state, and the other effect winning opportunity flags are set to the off state. For example, when the lottery trigger of the pseudo-bonus is "watermelon" and the pseudo-bonus is won, the watermelon release flag is set to the on state, and the other effect winning trigger flags are set to the off state.

After the processing of S119 or when the determination of YES in S118, the main CPU 51 performs the pseudo bonus setting processing (S120). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the initial value of the number of remaining pseudo-bonus games corresponding to the type of the winning pseudo-bonus. When the type of the winning pseudo-bonus is "current game pseudo-BB" or "next game pseudo-BB", "70" is set as the initial value of the number of remaining pseudo-bonus games, and the type of the winning pseudo-bonus is ". In the case of "current game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo RB", "20" is set as the initial value of the number of remaining pseudo bonus games.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs the effect game state update process (S121). In this process, for example, when the type of the winning pseudo-bonus is "current game pseudo RB" or "current game pseudo BB", the main CPU 51 sets the waiting state in the directed game state. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores the data "1" in the bit 2 (alignment waiting state) of the effect game state storage area (see FIG. 75). Further, for example, when the type of the winning pseudo-bonus is "next game pseudo RB" or "next game pseudo BB", the main CPU 51 sets the notification waiting state in the directed game state. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores the data "1" in the bit 1 (notification waiting state) of the effect game state storage area (see FIG. 75).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process of the number of pseudo-bonus release games (the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games) (S122). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets a value of "65535" to the number of pseudo-bonus release games.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel lock lottery process (S123). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the reel lock lottery table (see FIGS. 40 to 47), and sets the current effect lottery state (mode), the winning type of the pseudo bonus, the effect lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the like. Based on the winning / non-winning of the reel lock and the reel lock type at the time of winning (either "short lock", "freeze A", "freeze B", "short lock + freeze A" or "short lock + freeze B" Or) is decided.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not to perform reel lock based on the lottery result of the reel lock lottery process (S124). When the main CPU 51 determines in S124 that the reel lock is not performed (when the determination in S124 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the normal lottery process, and performs the process in S106 of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Move to.

On the other hand, in S124, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel lock is to be performed (when the determination in S124 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the effect reservation flag update process (S125). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the effect reservation flag corresponding to the type of reel lock determined by the reel lock lottery to the ON state. For example, when the type of reel lock determined by the reel lock lottery is "short lock", the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to the ON state, and the type of reel lock determined by the reel lock lottery is set. In the case of "freeze A", the main CPU 51 sets the freeze A flag to the on state. Further, for example, when the type of reel lock determined by the reel lock lottery is "short lock + freeze A", the main CPU 51 sets both the short lock flag and the freeze A flag in the ON state.

Then, after the processing of S125, the main CPU 51 ends the normal lottery process, and shifts the process to S106 of the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87).

As described above, the pseudo bonus lottery process (S115) during the normal lottery process is executed by the main control circuit 41. Further, the stock lottery process (S107) of the pseudo BB (1G series) during the normal medium lottery process during the lever-on time lottery process described with reference to FIG. 87 is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 is a means for determining whether or not to shift to the pseudo-bonus state (notified game state) and a determination for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state (notified game state) (stock of 1G series). It also serves as a means for determining the presence or absence of (notification game determination means).

[Mode transition lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the mode transition lottery process performed in S106 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the lottery process when the lever is turned on will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the effect winning trigger flags are in the off state or the pseudo BB stock release flags are in the on state (S131).

In S131, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S131 is satisfied (when the determination in S131 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the mode transition lottery process, and performs the process by the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Transfer to S107. That is, in the present embodiment, the mode transition lottery is not performed not only when the pseudo-bonus is not started but also when the pseudo-bonus game is continued by the release of the pseudo-BB of 1G series.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S131 that the determination condition of S131 is not satisfied (NO in S131), the main CPU 51 performs a mode transition lottery process (S132). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo bonus start mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 48 to 51), and refers to the current effect lottery state (mode), the type and setting of the pseudo bonus to be started, and the effect lottery flag. The effect lottery state (any of modes 0 to 7) of the transition destination is determined based on (internal winning combination) and the like.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs the effect lottery state update process based on the lottery result of the mode transition lottery process (S133). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the next pseudo-bonus transition game number lottery process (S134). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the next pseudo-bonus shift game number lottery table (see FIG. 55) based on the set effect lottery state (mode), and determines the number of next pseudo-bonus shift games. In this process, when mode 3 is set, "100 to 199" is determined as the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games, but in this case, the main CPU 51 further sets the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games. With reference to the table corresponding to the random value (see FIG. 56), the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games corresponding to the random value is determined.

Next, the main CPU 51 updates the number of pseudo-bonus release games (S135). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the number of next pseudo-bonus transfer games obtained in the next pseudo-bonus transfer game number lottery process to the number of pseudo-bonus release games. Then, after the processing of S135, the main CPU 51 ends the mode transition lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S107 of the lever-on time lottery processing (see FIG. 87).

[Stock lottery processing]
Next, the stock lottery process performed in S107 in the flowchart (see FIG. 87) of the lottery process when the lever is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the normal game state or the notification waiting state (S141).

In S141, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the normal game state or the notification waiting state (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the stock lottery process and performs the process by the lever-on lottery process. Move to S108 (see FIG. 87). On the other hand, in S141, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the normal game state or the notification waiting state (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 51 is in the state of waiting for the effect game states. (S142).

In S142, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game states are not in the waiting state (when the determination in S142 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S149 described later.

On the other hand, in S142, when the main CPU 51 determines that the production game states are in the waiting state (when the determination in S142 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a stock lottery process (at the start of the pseudo bonus) (S143). .. In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo BB stock lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus (see FIGS. 57A and 57B), and is pseudo based on the type of the pseudo bonus to be started and the current effect lottery state (mode). Determine the stock winning / non-winning of BB.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stock lottery process has been won (S144).

In S144, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stock lottery process has not been won (when the determination in S144 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S149 described later. On the other hand, in S144, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stock lottery process has been won (when the determination in S144 is YES), the main CPU 51 adds "1" to the value of the effect reservation counter (S145). The effect reservation counter is a counter that counts the number of stocks of the pseudo BB, and is provided in the main RAM 53.

After the process of S145, the main CPU 51 performs a long weight lottery process (at the start of the pseudo bonus) (S146). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the long weight lottery table at the start of the pseudo bonus (see FIGS. 63A to 63D), the type of the pseudo bonus to be started, and the presence / absence of the winning of the stock lottery (presence / absence of the pseudo BB of 1G series). ), The winning / non-winning of the long weight production (short lock) is determined. Further, in this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the long weight generation game lottery table (see FIGS. 64 to 67), the type of the pseudo bonus to be started, and the presence / absence of the winning of the stock lottery (presence / absence of the pseudo BB of 1G series). ) To determine the game in which the long weight effect is generated. If the long weight lottery is won at the start of the pseudo RB, any unit game of the second game to the twentieth game during the pseudo RB game period is determined as the game in which the long weight effect is generated. Further, when the long weight lottery is won at the start of the pseudo BB, any unit game of the second game to the 70th game during the pseudo BB game period is determined as the game in which the long weight effect is generated.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the long weight lottery process (at the start of the pseudo bonus) has been won (S147).

In S147, when the main CPU 51 determines that the long weight lottery process (at the start of the pseudo bonus) did not win (when the determination in S147 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S151 described later. On the other hand, in S147, when the main CPU 51 determines that the long weight lottery process (at the start of the pseudo bonus) has been won (when the determination in S147 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the winning result in the number of long weight occurrence games. (S148).

After the processing of S148, or when S142 or S144 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the current game is a game in which a long weight effect is generated (S149). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the current game is a game in which a long weight effect is generated, based on the set number of long weight generation games and the current number of remaining pseudo bonus games. ..

In S149, when the main CPU 51 determines that the current game is not a game in which a long weight effect is generated (when the determination in S149 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S151 described later. On the other hand, in S149, when the main CPU 51 determines that the current game is a game in which a long weight effect is generated (when the determination in S149 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to the ON state (S150).

After the processing of S150, or when S147 or S149 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 51 performs a stock lottery processing (during a pseudo bonus) (S151). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo BB stock lottery table (see FIG. 58) during the pseudo bonus, and determines the stock win / non-win of the pseudo BB based on the effect lottery flag (internal winning combination).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stock lottery process has been won (S152).

In S152, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stock lottery process has not been won (when the determination in S152 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the stock lottery process and performs the process in the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Transfer to S108.

On the other hand, in S152, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stock lottery process has been won (when the determination in S152 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the mode transition lottery process (during the pseudo bonus) (S153). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo-bonus medium mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 52 and 53), and shifts based on the current effect lottery state (mode) and effect lottery flag (internal winning combination). The previous production lottery state (any of modes 0 to 7) is determined.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process of the number of pseudo-bonus release games (S154). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets "65535" to the number of pseudo-bonus release games. Next, the main CPU 51 performs the effect lottery state (mode) update process based on the lottery result of the mode transition lottery process (S155).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs the next pseudo-bonus transition game number lottery process (S156). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the next pseudo-bonus shift game number lottery table (see FIG. 55) based on the updated effect lottery state (mode), and determines the number of next pseudo-bonus shift games. In this process, when mode 3 is set, "100 to 199" is determined as the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games, but in this case, the main CPU 51 further sets the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games. With reference to the table corresponding to the random value (see FIG. 56), the number of next pseudo-bonus transition games corresponding to the random value is determined.

Next, the main CPU 51 updates the number of pseudo-bonus release games (S157). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the number of next pseudo-bonus transfer games obtained in the next pseudo-bonus transfer game number lottery process to the number of pseudo-bonus release games.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a long weight lottery process (during a pseudo bonus) (S158). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the long-weight lottery table (see FIG. 68) during the pseudo-bonus, and sets the effect lottery flag (internal winning combination) and the presence / absence of the stock lottery winning (presence / absence of 1G series pseudo BB). Based on this, the winning / non-winning of the long weight production (short lock) is determined.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the long weight lottery process (during the pseudo bonus) has been won (S159).

In S159, when the main CPU 51 determines that the long weight lottery process (during the pseudo bonus) has not been won (when the determination in S159 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S161 described later.

On the other hand, in S159, when the main CPU 51 determines that the long weight lottery process (during the pseudo bonus) has been won (when the determination in S159 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to the ON state (S160). .. If the short lock flag is already on before the processing of S160 (when the processing of S150 described above is performed in the current game), the main CPU 51 is in the on state of the short lock flag in the processing of S160. Perform the process to maintain.

After the processing of S160 or when the determination in S159 is NO, the main CPU 51 adds "1" to the value of the effect reservation counter (S161). Then, after the processing of S161, the main CPU 51 ends the stock lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S108 of the lever-on time lottery processing (see FIG. 87).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the stock lottery process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 is a means for determining whether or not to execute the 1G continuous pseudo BB after the end of the game period of the pseudo bonus in the game (including the start game) during the pseudo bonus (including the start game). It also serves as a means for determining the continuation of the notification game and a means for determining the notification game). Further, in the present embodiment, the long weight lottery process (S146 and S158) during the stock lottery process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for determining whether or not the long weight effect is executed and a game for generating the long weight (lock effect determining means).

[Reel production lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the reel effect lottery process performed in S108 in the flowchart of the lottery process at the time of lever-on (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the production game states are in the waiting state (S171).

In S171, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game states are not in the waiting state (NO in S171), the main CPU 51 ends the reel effect lottery process and the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87). Also ends.

On the other hand, in S171, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game states are in the waiting state (when the determination in S171 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect lottery process (at the start of the pseudo bonus) (S172). .. In this process, the pseudo-bonus start stop effect pattern lottery table (see FIGS. 59 to 62) is referred to, and the pseudo-bonus start is based on the current effect lottery state (mode), the winning type of the pseudo-bonus, and the presence / absence of freeze. The reel stop effect pattern (any of patterns No. 0 to 27) in the rotating cylinder effect is determined.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the stop line selection information of the symbol combination (BIG alignment or REG alignment) to be automatically stopped based on the lottery result of the reel effect lottery process (S173). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the stop position information of the symbol combination (BIG alignment or REG alignment) to be automatically stopped based on the lottery result of the reel effect lottery process (S174).

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the stop order information (left middle right, right middle left or simultaneous) of the reels to be automatically stopped based on the lottery result of the reel effect lottery process (S175). Then, after the process of S175, the main CPU 51 ends the reel effect lottery process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 87).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the BB gaming state (S181).

In S181, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is the BB gaming state (when the determination in S181 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S183 described later. On the other hand, in S181, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is not the BB gaming state (when the determination in S181 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer as the rotation stop number. (S182).

After the processing of S182 or when the determination in S181 is YES, the main CPU 51 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown), and based on the acquired rotation stop number, various information corresponding to the rotation stop number. (S183). In this process, the number of the stop table of the reels used during the first stop to the third stop and the information necessary for the control change process (when the reels are stopped in a specific order and the reels are stopped at a specific position). Information for reselecting the stop table) and the like are acquired again.

The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the reel stop number and various information such as the pull-in priority table selection data and the pull-in priority table number, which will be described later. Further, the stop table is a table that directly or indirectly defines information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position of the stop button. In this stop table, the number of sliding pieces is used so that the reel stops at the stop position intended by the designer so as not to give a disadvantage to the player and to cause a false winning by using the specified information. Is stipulated.

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73) (S184).

Next, the main CPU 51 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S185). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 81). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Reel rotation start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the reel rotation start processing performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not to execute the reel effect (S191). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not at least one of the effect reservation flag and various information (stop effect pattern) related to the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is set. When at least one of the effect reservation flag and various information (stop effect pattern) related to the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is set, the main CPU 51 determines that the reel effect is executed.

In S191, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel effect is not executed (when the determination in S191 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the weight time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has elapsed. (S192).

In S192, when the main CPU 51 determines that the weight time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game (when the determination in S192 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S192.

On the other hand, in S192, when the main CPU 51 determines that the weight time from the start of the previous game has elapsed (when the determination in S192 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the reel normal acceleration process (S193). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts a reel acceleration control process for accelerating all reels to a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S194). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data for a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. The reel rotation start command includes a parameter indicating that the reel acceleration control process has been started.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (S195).

In S195, when the main CPU 51 determines that the rotation speed of each reel has not reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (when the determination in S195 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S195.

On the other hand, in S195, when the main CPU 51 determines that the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (when the determination in S195 is YES), the main CPU 51 generates and stores a constant speed start command. (S196). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a constant speed start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The constant speed start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. The constant speed start command includes a parameter indicating that the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed).

Then, after the processing of S196, the main CPU 51 ends the reel rotation start processing, and shifts the processing to S11 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

Here, returning to the process of S191 again, when it is determined in S191 that the main CPU 51 executes the reel effect (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process at the time of executing the reel effect (S197). The details of the reel effect execution processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. Then, after the processing of S197, the main CPU 51 ends the reel rotation start processing, and shifts the processing to S11 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in S192 during the reel rotation start processing, it is determined whether or not the weight time has elapsed from the start of the previous game, and if the weight time has not elapsed, the reel is accelerated. The weight state is maintained without starting the process. Then, this process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 determines whether or not the weight time has elapsed since the start of the previous game, and if the weight time has not elapsed, the means for not starting the reel rotation operation. Also serves as a (weight execution means).

[Processing during reel production execution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the reel effect execution time processing performed in S197 during the reel rotation start processing (see FIG. 94) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets the notification weight time (2000 msec) in the timer (S201). The timer subtraction process (count process) for counting the notification weight time is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has elapsed (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 51 determines that the weight time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game (when the determination in S202 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S202.

On the other hand, in S202, when the main CPU 51 determines that the wait time from the start of the previous game has elapsed (when the determination in S202 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the effect instruction command (effect start) generation and storage process (when the S202 determines YES). S203). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109.

In the effect instruction command generated by this process, an effect instruction parameter indicating the start of execution of the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect) is set. Specifically, in the effect instruction command of the data structure shown in FIG. 80, as the effect instruction parameters, 01H (production game stop 7, 8 start), 03H (effect game stop 5 (second half), 6 start), 07H Either (starting the production game stop 2), 09H (starting the production game stop 1), 0CH (starting the production game stop 4) or 0EH (starting the production game stop 3) depends on the production pattern to be executed. Set.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel lock process (S204). When the reel lock ("short lock", "freeze A", "freeze B", "short lock + freeze A" or "short lock + freeze B") is determined by the reel lock lottery, the main in this process is The CPU 51 performs the determined reel lock execution process. The details of the reel lock process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (pseudo rotation start) generation / storage process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109.

In the effect instruction command generated by this process, an effect instruction parameter indicating the start of the pseudo rotation operation of the reel in the pseudo bonus start rotation body effect is set. Specifically, in the effect instruction command of the data structure shown in FIG. 80, 0BH (pseudo rotation start) is set as the effect instruction parameter. When the reel effect is an effect accompanied by a short lock (long weight effect), a rotation start sound is generated at the timing when the effect instruction command generated in S205 is received by the sub-control circuit 42.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the reel stop preparation data (S206). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the execution data of the stop preparation operation 1 described above. Specifically, during the rotation of the reel, the relative positional relationship between the symbol "Red 7" on the left reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" on the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "Red 7" on the right reel 3R, or the left. The rotation speed of each reel is set so that the relative positional relationship between the symbol "Red 7" on the reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" on the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "BAR" on the right reel 3R becomes a predetermined positional relationship. Data for fine adjustment is set. It should be noted that this data is appropriately changed according to the automatic stop effect pattern of the set reel.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel effect control process during preparation for stopping (S207). In this process, the main CPU 51 uses the data set in S206 to rotate the left reel 3L with the symbol "Red 7", the middle reel 3C with the symbol "Red 7", and the right reel 3R with the symbol "Red 7". The relative positional relationship of "Red 7" or the relative positional relationship of the symbol "Red 7" on the left reel 3L, the symbol "Red 7" on the middle reel 3C, and the symbol "BAR" on the right reel 3R is a predetermined position. The rotational operation of each reel is controlled so as to be related.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the notification weight time (2000 msec) has elapsed (S208). That is, the main CPU 51 performs the process of the stop preparation operation 2 described above.

When the main CPU 51 determines in S208 that the notification weight time has not elapsed (when the determination in S208 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S208. When a long freeze such as freeze A or freeze B is executed in the reel lock process of S204, S208 automatically determines YES.

On the other hand, in S208, when the main CPU 51 determines that the notification weight time has elapsed (when the determination in S208 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs reel automatic stop processing (S209). In this process, the reel automatic stop control process is performed based on the reel stop effect pattern (stop pattern of the reel automatic stop effect) in the set pseudo-bonus start rotation effect. The details of the reel automatic stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pseudo bonus display time process (S210). In this process, when the symbol combination related to the pseudo bonus is automatically stopped, a waiting time for executing various effects performed under the control of the sub-control circuit 42 is set. The details of the pseudo-bonus display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pseudo-bonus initialization process (S211). In this process, the main CPU 51 mainly performs output processing of a pseudo-bonus start signal (external signal) to the external terminal plate 18S, pseudo-bonus winning lock processing, stop processing of reel production, and the like. The details of the pseudo-bonus initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 normally performs the acceleration restart process (S212). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts a reel acceleration control process for accelerating all reels to a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (restart of rotation) generation and storage process (S213). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109.

In the effect instruction command generated by this process, an effect instruction parameter indicating that the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect has ended and the normal acceleration process has been resumed is set. Specifically, in the effect instruction command of the data structure shown in FIG. 80, 10H (restart of rotation) is set as the effect instruction parameter. That is, in the unit game in which the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is executed, at the start of the normal acceleration process, instead of the reel rotation start command, an effect instruction command (10H) in which the effect instruction parameter (10H) of "restart rotation" is set is issued. It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the reel rotation start command may be transmitted before or after the transmission of the effect instruction command in which the effect instruction parameter (10H) of "restart rotation" is set. In this case, the reel rotation start command generation / storage process is performed before or after the process of S214.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (S214).

In S214, when the main CPU 51 determines that the rotation speed of each reel has not reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (when the determination in S214 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S214.

On the other hand, in S214, when the main CPU 51 determines that the rotation speed of each reel has reached a predetermined rotation speed (constant speed) (when the determination in S214 is YES), the main CPU 51 generates and stores a constant speed start command. (S215). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a constant speed start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The constant speed start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109.

Then, after the processing of S215, the main CPU 51 ends the reel effect execution time processing, and also ends the reel rotation start processing (see FIG. 94).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reel effect execution time process (pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect execution process) is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (display column effect execution means, effect execution means) for executing the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect. Further, the main control circuit 41 executes the determination process of whether or not the notification weight time of S208, which is being processed at the time of executing the reel effect, has elapsed. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (elapsed time determining means) for determining whether or not the notification weight time has elapsed.

[Reel lock processing]
Next, the reel lock process performed in S204 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution time process (see FIG. 95) will be described with reference to FIG. 96.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the short lock flag is in the ON state (S221).

In S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the short lock flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S226 described later. On the other hand, in S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the short lock flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the short lock lock time (for example, 1000 msec) (S222). The timer subtraction process for counting the short lock execution time is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the short lock lock time has elapsed (S223).

When the main CPU 51 determines in S223 that the lock time for short lock has not elapsed (when the determination in S223 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S223. On the other hand, in S223, when the main CPU 51 determines that the short lock lock time has elapsed (when the determination in S223 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the short lock flag to the off state (S224).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel acceleration start process (S225). By this process, the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is started. In the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the present embodiment, the pseudo-bonus winning (start) notification effect (notification lamp lighting effect) is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42 at the timing immediately before the acceleration start process of the reel of S225. Is done. Then, after the processing of S225, the main CPU 51 ends the reel lock processing, and shifts the processing to S205 of the reel effect execution time processing (see FIG. 95).

Here, returning to the process of S221 again, if S221 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether the freeze A flag is on and the current game is a pseudo-bonus notification game (starting game). Is determined (S226). Whether or not the current game is a pseudo-bonus notification game (starting game) is determined based on the production game state, and when the production game states are in the waiting state, the main CPU 51 is currently in the waiting state. It is determined that the game is a pseudo-bonus notification game (starting game).

When the main CPU 51 determines in S226 that the determination condition of S226 is not satisfied (when the determination in S226 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S230 described later. On the other hand, in S226, when the main CPU 51 determines that the determination condition of S226 is satisfied (YES in S226), the main CPU 51 sets the freeze A lock time (for example, 30,000 msec) (S227). The timer subtraction process for counting the execution time of freeze A is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze A lock time has elapsed (S228).

When the main CPU 51 determines in S228 that the lock time for freeze A has not elapsed (when the determination in S228 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S228. On the other hand, in S228, when the main CPU 51 determines that the freeze A lock time has elapsed (when the determination in S228 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the freeze A flag to the off state (S229).

After the processing of S229 or when the determination in S226 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze B flag is on and the current game is a pseudo-bonus notification game (starting game) (S230). ..

When the main CPU 51 determines in S230 that the determination condition of S230 is not satisfied (when the determination in S230 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S233 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S230 that the determination condition of S230 is satisfied (when the determination in S230 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the freeze B lock time (for example, 2000 msec) and the game lock time (30000 msec). (S231). The timer subtraction process for counting these lock execution times is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze B lock time has elapsed (S232).

In S232, when the main CPU 51 determines that the freeze B lock time has not elapsed (when the determination in S232 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S232. On the other hand, in S232, when the main CPU 51 determines that the freeze B lock time has elapsed (when S232 determines YES) or when S230 determines NO, the main CPU 51 performs reel acceleration start processing (S233). ). By this process, the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is started. In the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect of the present embodiment, the pseudo-bonus winning (start) notification effect (notification lamp lighting effect) is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42 at the timing immediately before the acceleration start process of the reel of S233. Is done.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S234). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data for a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109.

When the reel effect is an effect that does not involve a short lock, a rotation start sound is generated at the timing when the reel rotation start command generated in S234 is received by the sub-control circuit 42. Then, after the processing of S234, the main CPU 51 ends the reel lock processing, and shifts the processing to S205 of the reel effect execution time processing (see FIG. 95).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reel lock process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for generating a lock (lock execution means, lock effect execution means).

[Reel automatic stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the reel automatic stop processing performed in S209 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution time processing (see FIG. 95) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel stop effect pattern in the set pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is the all-rotation simultaneous stop pattern (S241).

In S241, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop effect pattern of the reel is not the simultaneous stop pattern for all rotation cylinders (when the determination in S241 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S245 described later. On the other hand, in S241, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop effect pattern of the reel is the simultaneous stop pattern for all reels (when the determination in S241 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the weight time for simultaneous stop of all reels. (S242). The timer subtraction process for counting the weight time for simultaneous stop of all rotation cylinders is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the weight time for simultaneous stop of all rotations has elapsed (S243). In S243, when the main CPU 51 determines that the weight time for simultaneous stop of all rotations has not elapsed (when the determination in S243 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S243.

On the other hand, in S243, when the main CPU 51 determines that the weight time for simultaneous stop of all rotations has elapsed (when the determination in S243 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the effect instruction command (pseudo stop) generation and storage process (when the determination is YES in S243). S244). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109.

The effect instruction command data generated by this process includes an effect instruction parameter indicating that the reel has been pseudo-stopped in the reel automatic stop effect. Specifically, in the effect instruction command of the data structure shown in FIG. 80, 06H (pseudo stop) is set as the effect instruction parameter.

Further, when the effect instruction command (pseudo stop) generated by this process is transmitted, the main CPU 51 sets the stop button operation flag corresponding to the reel that has been pseudo-stopped to the ON state. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores "1" in a bit in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the target reel. In the process of S244, all the stop button operation flags are set to the ON state.

Then, after the processing of S244, the main CPU 51 ends the reel automatic stop processing, and shifts the processing to S210 of the reel effect execution time processing (see FIG. 95).

Here, returning to the process of S241 again, when the determination in S241 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs the reel acceleration start process (S245). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation control process for one turn from the elapse of the notification weight time (2000 msec) to the start of automatic reel stop.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the data of the reel stop effect pattern (any of patterns No. 0 to 27) in the pseudo-bonus start rotation cylinder effect determined by the reel effect lottery (S246). Next, the main CPU 51 checks the reel preparation eyes generated in the reel stop preparation operation 1 (S247). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not the symbol position of each rotating reel is a position corresponding to the stop effect pattern of the reels.

For example, when the stop effect pattern of the reels is the normal stop pattern of "BIG alignment", the main CPU 51 has the symbol "red 7" of the left reel 3L, the symbol "red 7" of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. It is checked whether or not the symbol "Red 7" is in a horizontal row (reel preparation eye) while the reel is rotating. At this point, if the symbol position of each rotating reel is not a position corresponding to the reel stop effect pattern, the main CPU 51 performs this process, and the symbol position of each rotating reel is the reel stop. Adjust the rotation status of the reel so that the position corresponds to the effect pattern.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (pseudo-press) generation / storage process (S248). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109.

The effect instruction command data generated by this process includes a parameter indicating the type of the reel that is pseudo-pressed in the reel automatic stop effect. Specifically, in the effect instruction command of the data structure shown in FIG. 80, 05H (pseudo-press) is set as the effect instruction parameter, and the type of reel corresponding to the pseudo-pressed stop button (press rotation cylinder). Each data of the pseudo-pressed symbol position (pressed position) and the scheduled stop symbol position (scheduled stop position) is set.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the target reel for pseudo pressing has automatically stopped (S249). In S249, when the main CPU 51 determines that the target reel for pseudo pressing is not automatically stopped (when the determination in S249 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S249.

On the other hand, in S249, when the main CPU 51 determines that the target reel for pseudo pressing has automatically stopped (when the determination in S249 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (pseudo stop) generation / storage process (S250). .. In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109.

The effect instruction command data generated by this process includes an effect instruction parameter indicating that the target reel has been pseudo-stopped in the reel automatic stop effect. Specifically, in the effect instruction command of the data structure shown in FIG. 80, 06H (pseudo stop) is set as the effect instruction parameter.

Further, when the effect instruction command (pseudo stop) generated by this process is transmitted, the main CPU 51 sets the stop button operation flag corresponding to the target reel that has been pseudo-stopped to the ON state. Specifically, the main CPU 51 stores "1" in a bit in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the target reel.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the reels have been pseudo (automatically) stopped (S251).

In S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that all reels have not been pseudo (automatically) stopped (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S248 and changes the target reel for pseudo pressing. Then, the processing after S248 is repeated.

On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that all reels have been pseudo (automatically) stopped (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel automatic stop processing and performs the processing at the time of executing the reel effect. Transfer to S210 for processing (see FIG. 95).

The reel automatic stop processing described above is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (design automatic stop means) for executing the reel automatic stop processing.

[Processing when pseudo bonus is displayed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the pseudo bonus display time processing performed in S210 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution time processing (see FIG. 95) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel stop effect pattern in the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is the pseudo RB stop pattern (S261).

In S261, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop effect pattern of the reel is the stop pattern of the pseudo RB (when the determination in S261 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the display waiting time for the pseudo RB (S262). .. In the period of the display waiting time for the pseudo RB, various effects for notifying the start of the pseudo RB are performed by the control of the sub control circuit 42. Next, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S266 described later.

On the other hand, in S261, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel stop effect pattern is not the pseudo RB stop pattern (NO in S261), the main CPU 51 determines that the reel stop effect pattern in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect. Determines whether or not is a high-speed stop pattern (S263).

In S263, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop effect pattern of the reel is the high-speed stop pattern (when the determination in S263 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the display waiting time after the high-speed stop (S264). During the period of the display waiting time after the high-speed stop, various effects for notifying the start of the pseudo BB at the time of the high-speed stop are performed by the control of the sub control circuit 42. Next, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S266 described later.

On the other hand, in S263, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop effect pattern of the reel is not the high-speed stop pattern (NO determination in S263), the main CPU 51 waits for the end of the effect by the sound effect at the time of pseudo BB display. Set (S265). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S266 described later.

After the processing of S262, S264 or S265, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the waiting time set in these processing has elapsed (S266). The timer subtraction process for counting the waiting time is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109, which will be described later.

When the main CPU 51 determines in S266 that the waiting time has not elapsed (NO in S266), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S266. On the other hand, in S266, when the main CPU 51 determines that the waiting time has elapsed (when the determination in S266 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo bonus display time processing and performs the processing at the reel effect execution time processing (FIG. 95). (See) to S211.

[Pseudo bonus initialization process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the pseudo bonus initialization process performed in S211 in the flowchart of the reel effect execution time process (see FIG. 95) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel stop effect pattern in the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect is the pseudo BB stop pattern (S271). In S271, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop effect pattern of the reel is not the stop pattern of the pseudo BB (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S276 described later.

On the other hand, in S271, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop effect pattern of the reel is the stop pattern of the pseudo BB (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the output request of the external signal 1 (S272). ). Next, the main CPU 51 outputs the external signal 1 to the external terminal plate 18S (S273). By this process, the information regarding the start of the pseudo BB is transmitted to the hall computer / calling device 100.

After the process of S273, the main CPU 51 sets the pseudo bonus winning lock time (4000 msec) for the pseudo BB (S274). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reservation process of the pseudo bonus END lock for the pseudo BB (S275). By this process, the execution of the pseudo bonus END lock effect at the end of the set of the started pseudo BB is reserved. Then, after the processing of S275, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S280 described later.

Here, returning to the processing of S271 again, when the determination in S271 is NO, the main CPU 51 sets the output request of the external signal 2 (S276). Next, the main CPU 51 outputs the external signal 2 to the external terminal plate 18S (S277). By this process, the information regarding the start of the pseudo RB is transmitted to the hall computer / calling device 100.

After the processing of S277, the main CPU 51 sets the pseudo bonus winning lock time (700 msec) for the pseudo RB (S278). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reservation process of the pseudo bonus END lock for the pseudo RB (S279). By this process, the execution of the pseudo bonus END lock effect at the end of the set of the started pseudo RB is reserved. Then, after the processing of S279, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S280 described later.

After the processing of S275 or S279, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the set pseudo bonus winning lock time has elapsed (S280). The timer subtraction process for counting the pseudo-bonus winning lock time is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109, which will be described later.

In S280, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus winning lock time has not elapsed (when the determination in S280 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S280. On the other hand, in S280, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus winning lock time has elapsed (when the determination in S280 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the reel effect stop processing (S281). In this process, the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo-bonus start rotating cylinder effect, then accelerates all reels to a predetermined rotation speed, and then performs a process of maintaining the rotation speeds of all reels at a predetermined rotation speed. .. That is, in this process, the main CPU 51 performs a normal acceleration process of the reel after finishing the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect instruction command (effect end) generation and storage process (S282). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of an effect instruction command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The effect instruction command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109.

In the effect instruction command generated by this process, an effect instruction parameter indicating the end of the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation body effect) is set. Specifically, in the effect instruction command of the data structure shown in FIG. 80, as the effect instruction parameters, 02H (end of game stop 7 and 8 for effect), 04H (end of game stop 5 and 6 for effect), 08H (for effect). Either game stop 2 end), 0AH (production game stop 1 end), 0DH (production game stop 4 end), or 0FH (production game stop 3 end) is set according to the executed production pattern. ..

Next, the main CPU 51 clears the stop button operation flag (S283). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the stop button operation flag of each reel, which is pseudo-set in the automatic stop effect of the reels, to the off state.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the freeze B flag is in the ON state (S284).

In S284, when the main CPU 51 determines that the freeze B flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S284 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo-bonus initialization process and performs the process at the time of executing the reel effect (FIG. 95). (See) to S212. On the other hand, in S284, when the main CPU 51 determines that the freeze B flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S284 is YES), has the main CPU 51 passed the game lock time (30000 msec from the start of locking the freeze B)? Whether or not it is determined (S285).

In S285, when the main CPU 51 determines that the game lock time has not elapsed (NO in S285), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S285. On the other hand, in S285, when the main CPU 51 determines that the game lock time has elapsed (when the determination in S285 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the freeze B flag to the off state (S286). Then, after the processing of S286, the main CPU 51 ends the pseudo-bonus initialization processing, and shifts the processing to S212 of the reel effect execution time processing (see FIG. 95).

It should be noted that the waiting time of S266 during the pseudo bonus display processing (FIG. 98) described above (display waiting time for pseudo RB, display waiting time after high-speed stop, or end waiting time of production by sound effect at pseudo BB display) ), And the pseudo-bonus winning lock time digestion process of S280 during the pseudo-bonus initialization process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 is a means (notification) for executing the lock effect after the reel automatic stop process (after the "BIG alignment" or "REG alignment" is stopped) in the pseudo bonus start rotation effect. It also serves as a start lock effect execution means).

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S11 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 stores the value of the stop button non-operation counter in the main RAM 53 as the number of searches (S291). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a search target reel determination process (S292). In this process, the main CPU 51 selects, for example, a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as the search target reel.

For example, in the process of S292, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S301 described later are performed on the left reel 3L, and when returning to S292 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S301, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S292 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S293). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the position data of the search symbol and sets "20" as the number of symbol checks (S294). Then, the main CPU 51 performs a symbol code storage process (S295). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the position data of the current search symbol located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 69) based on the symbol code acquired in S295 and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73) (S296). At this point, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won, a displayable symbol combination (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol.

In this embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable winning combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable winning combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 23) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S297). In this process, the main CPU 51 gives priority to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 69) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. Refer to the ranking table (not shown) to acquire the pull-in priority data.

The attraction priority table is a table that defines the correspondence between the attraction priority data for each storage area type in each attraction priority table number and the predetermined priority. The pull-in priority table is used to search for a more appropriate number of slip pieces in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order in which the symbols are preferentially stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Normally, the order of priority is set in the order of replay, small win, and bonus from the highest.

Further, in the case of a symbol position that would result in an erroneous winning when stopped, "use prohibited (000H)" is acquired as the attraction priority data in S297. Further, in the case of a symbol position that is not internally won but does not result in an erroneous winning even if it is stopped, "stop possible (001H)" is acquired as the pull-in priority data in S297.

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (not shown) corresponding to the search target reel (S298). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other.

The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of reel. In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "19" of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the stop table.

Further, the content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority.

By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the draw-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. If there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

Next, the main CPU 51 adds "1" to the position data of the search symbol and subtracts "1" from the number of symbol checks (S299). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S300).

In S300, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is not "0" (when the determination in S300 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S295 and repeats the processes after S295. On the other hand, in S300, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (when the determination in S300 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S301).

When it is determined in S301 that the main CPU 51 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S301 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S292 and repeats the processes after S292. On the other hand, when it is determined in S301 that the main CPU 51 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S301 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority storage process and performs the process in S12 of the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S293 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 100) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the attraction priority table selection data is set (S311).

When the main CPU 51 determines in S311 that the attraction priority table selection data is set (when the determination in S311 is YES), the main CPU 51 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 72) and an operation stop button storage area. (See FIG. 71), the attraction priority table number corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data is set from the attraction priority table selection table (not shown) (S312). Then, after the processing of S312, the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S294 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 100).

The attraction priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the attraction priority selection number and the pressing order of the stop button and the attraction priority table number in each combination. Further, the attraction priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the above-mentioned attraction priority table (not shown).

On the other hand, in S311 when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority table selection data is not set (when the determination in S311 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the attraction priority table corresponding to the attraction priority table number. Set (S313). Then, after the processing of S313, the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S294 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 100).

[Design code storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the symbol code storage process performed in S295 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 100) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets valid line data (S321). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (cross-down line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S322). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S323). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S296 of the pull-in priority order storage process (see FIG. 100).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG. 103.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S331). When the main CPU 51 determines in S331 that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S331 and executes the operation of pressing the valid stop button. Wait until.

On the other hand, in S331, when the main CPU 51 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 51 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 72) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 72). 71) is updated (S332). Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts "1" from the value of the stop button non-operation counter (S333).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S334). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S335).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S336). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the number of slip pieces determination data based on the type of the stop button at the time of the first stop, various stop tables, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a priority pull-in control process (S337). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command generation / storage process (S338). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data for a reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of slip pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determination data acquired in S336, and stores the determined stop schedule position in the main RAM 53 (S339). In this process, the main CPU 51 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the scheduled stop position.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S339 as the search symbol position (S340). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 102 (S341). After that, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 73) using the acquired symbol code (S342).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a control change process (S343). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S344). When the main CPU 51 determines in S344 that the inactive counter is not "0" (when the determination in S344 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the attraction priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 100 (S345). ). After that, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S331 and repeats the processes after S331.

On the other hand, in S344, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S344 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 81). (See), move to S13.

As described above, the reel stop control process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing stop control of reel rotation (display of fluctuations in symbols).

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the priority pull-in control process performed in S337 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets the pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S351). Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the data of the stop start position (S352).

Next, the main CPU 51 sets a priority table corresponding to the slip piece number determination data (S353).

The priority order table includes data for determining the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table and a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding pieces ("0" to "4" when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4). ”) Priority is specified in the order of application (hereinafter referred to as“ priority order ”). That is, in the priority order table, the order of the number of slip pieces to be preferentially applied is determined for each slip piece number determination data. In this embodiment, each numerical value is searched (checked) sequentially from the lower priority order "5" in the priority order table, and the numerical value corresponding to the priority order "1" is preferentially applied as the number of slip pieces. To do so. Then, in the processing of S353, for example, when the number of sliding pieces determination data is "4", the priority data defined in the address in the priority order table corresponding to the number of sliding pieces determination data "4" is obtained. Set.

After the processing of S353, the main CPU 51 sets "5" in the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S354). By this process, the priority order is checked (searched) 5 times in the range of 0 to 4 frames. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the number of sliding pieces determination data as the number of sliding pieces (S355).

Next, the main CPU 51 extracts the stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S356). Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the pull-in priority data of the stop search position (S357).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the attraction priority data acquired in S357 is equal to or greater than the value of the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S358). In S358, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S357 is not equal to or higher than the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S358 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S360 described later. ..

On the other hand, in S358, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S357 is equal to or greater than the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S358 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the number of slip pieces. Update (S359).

After the processing of S359 or when the determination in S358 is NO, the main CPU 51 subtracts the value of the priority order and the number of checks by "1" (S360).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S361). In S361, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S361 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S356 and repeats the processes after S356.

On the other hand, in S361, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S361 is YES), the main CPU 51 finally sets the updated number of sliding pieces (S362). Then, after the processing of S362, the main CPU 51 ends the priority pull-in control processing, and shifts the processing to S338 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 103).

[Production processing after the third stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the third post-stop effect processing performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RB is operating by referring to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 70) (S371).

In S371, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is operating (when the determination in S371 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the effect processing after the third stop, and is performing the processing in the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move to S16. On the other hand, in S371, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is not operating (when the determination in S371 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect gaming state is the pseudo BB state or the pseudo RB state. (S372).

In S372, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the pseudo BB state or the pseudo RB state (when the determination in S372 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect process after the third stop, and the process is performed in the main flow. (See FIG. 81) Move to S16 in. On the other hand, in S372, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the pseudo BB state or the pseudo RB state (when the determination in S372 is YES), the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining pseudo bonus games. (S373).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of remaining pseudo bonus games is "0" (S374).

In S374, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of remaining pseudo bonus games is not "0" (when the determination in S374 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect processing after the third stop, and performs the processing in the main flow (FIG. Move to S16 in (see 81). On the other hand, in S374, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of remaining pseudo bonus games is "0" (when the determination in S374 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the pseudo bonus END lock time (S375). At this time, if the pseudo-bonus to end is a pseudo-BB, the main CPU 51 sets 5200 msec as the pseudo-bonus END lock time, and if the pseudo-bonus to end is a pseudo-RB, the main CPU 51 is a pseudo-bonus. Set 2500 msec as the END lock time. The timer subtraction process for counting the pseudo bonus END lock time is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus END lock time has elapsed (S376). In S376, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus END lock time has not elapsed (when the determination in S376 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S376.

On the other hand, in S376, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo bonus END lock time has elapsed (when the determination in S376 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the normal gaming state to the directed gaming state (S377). In this process, a process of setting the pseudo BB stock release flag to the off state is also performed. Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect reservation counter (the number of pseudo BB stocks) (S378).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect reservation counter (the number of pseudo BB stocks) is “0” (S379). In S379, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect reservation counter is "0" (when the determination in S379 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the effect process after the third stop, and performs the process in the main flow (when the effect is determined to be YES). Move to S16 in (see FIG. 81).

On the other hand, in S379, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect reservation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S379 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets the pseudo BB stock release flag to the ON state (S380). .. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the notification waiting state in the effect game state (S381). Then, after the processing of S381, the main CPU 51 ends the effect processing after the third stop, and shifts the processing to S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Medal payout process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the medal payout process performed in S16 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the settlement operation has been performed by the player (S391). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs this determination process based on the on / off state of the settlement switch 14S, and when the settlement switch 14S is in the on state, the main CPU 51 is said to have performed the settlement operation by the player. judge.

In S391, when the main CPU 51 determines that the settlement operation by the player has been performed (when the determination in S391 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S401 described later. On the other hand, in S391, when the main CPU 51 determines that the settlement operation by the player has not been performed (when the determination in S391 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination is a small combination (if the winning combination is a small combination). S392).

In S392, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination is not a small combination (when the determination in S392 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the credit information command generation / storage process (S393). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data for a credit information command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The credit information command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. The credit information command generated by this process includes information indicating that the number of medals to be paid out is 0 (value of the payout counter described later = 0) and information such as the current number of medals to be credited. Is done.

After the process of S393, the main CPU 51 performs the set process of the main demo transition timer (S394). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets a predetermined transition time to the demo and / or power saving mode state in the main demo transition timer. The demo set in the main demo transition timer and / or the predetermined transition time to the power saving mode state can be arbitrarily set in advance. Further, the counting process of the main demo transition timer (timer subtraction process for counting the demo transition time) is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109, which will be described later.

Then, after the process of S394, the main CPU 51 ends the medal payout process and shifts the process to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

On the other hand, in S392, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination is a small combination (when the determination in S392 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the type of winning combination in the payout counter. (S395). The payout counter is a counter that counts the number of medals to be paid out in one game, and is provided in the main RAM 53. For example, when the winning combination is the combination name "C_7 sheets A", "7" is set in the payout counter in the processing of S395 (see FIG. 18).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout instruction process (S396). In this process, the main CPU 51 outputs a payout instruction signal to the hopper drive circuit 65. As a result, one medal is paid out from the hopper 33.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a credit information command generation / storage process (S397). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data for a credit information command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The credit information command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. The credit information command generated by this process includes information such as the current value of the payout counter (remaining number of payouts) and the current number of credits for medals.

Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts the value of the payout counter by "1" (S398). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the payout counter is "0" (S399).

In S399, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the payout counter is not "0" (when the determination in S399 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S396 and repeats the processes after S396.

On the other hand, in S399, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the payout counter is "0" (when the determination in S399 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the set processing of the main demo transition timer (S400). In this process, the same process as the process described in S394 is performed. The counting process of the main demo transition timer is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109, which will be described later. Then, after the processing of S400, the main CPU 51 ends the medal payout processing and shifts the processing to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

Here, returning to the process of S391 again, when the determination in S391 is YES (when the settlement operation is performed by the player), the main CPU 51 performs the settlement sound command generation / storage process (S401). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data for a settlement sound command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The settlement sound command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. The settlement sound command generated by this process is data indicating the start of the settlement operation, and the sub-control circuit 42 side performs a process of setting the state to the settlement in progress state when the settlement sound command is received. It is said.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the current number of medals credits in the settlement counter (S402). The settlement counter is a counter that counts the number of medals to be paid out by the settlement operation, and is provided in the main RAM 53.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout instruction process (S403). By this process, one medal is paid out from the hopper 33.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a credit information command generation / storage process (S404). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data for a credit information command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The credit information command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. The credit information command generated by this process includes information such as the value of the settlement counter at the present time (current remaining number of credits).

Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts "1" from the value of the settlement counter (S405). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the settlement counter is "0" (S406).

In S406, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the settlement counter is not "0" (when the determination in S406 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S403 and repeats the processes after S403.

On the other hand, in S406, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the settlement counter is "0" (when the determination in S406 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the set processing of the main demo transition timer (S407). In this process, the same process as the process described in S394 is performed. The main demo transition timer counting process (timer subtraction process for counting the demo transition time) is performed by the timer update process during the interrupt process of FIG. 109, which will be described later. Then, after the processing of S407, the main CPU 51 ends the medal payout processing and shifts the processing to S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, the bonus end check process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG. 107.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the BB is operating by referring to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 70) (S411). In S411, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB is not operating (when the determination in S411 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process and shifts the process to S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move.

On the other hand, in S411, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB is operating (when the determination in S411 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0". (S412).

In S412, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S412 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the bonus end processing (S413). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the bonus end number counter and sets the game state flag (BB game state flag) corresponding to the operating BB to the off state. If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", it means that the payout of medals exceeds 90 during the BB game state.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end command generation and storage process (S414). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of the bonus (S415). Then, after the processing of S415, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

Here, returning to the process of S412 again, when the main CPU 51 determines in S412 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S412 is NO), the main CPU 51 can win a prize. Each value of the counter and the playable number counter is updated (S416). The value of the winning count counter is subtracted by "1" when a small winning combination (a winning combination with a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the gameable count counter is "1" in one game regardless of the stop symbol. It is subtracted.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the winning count counter or the game counter is "0" (S417). In S417, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the winning counter or the gameable counter is not "0" (when the determination in S417 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process. Then, the processing is transferred to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

On the other hand, in S417, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the gameable count counter is "0" (when the determination in S417 is YES), the main CPU 51 is at the end of RB. Process (S418). Specifically, processing such as setting the game status flag (RB game status flag) corresponding to RB to the off state, clearing the values of the winning count counter and the game counter is performed. After that, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, the bonus operation check process performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 81) will be described with reference to FIG. 108.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the BB is operating (S421). In S421, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB is not operating (when the determination in S421 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S424 described later.

On the other hand, in S421, when the main CPU 51 determines that the BB is operating (when the determination in S421 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RB is operating (S422). In S422, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is operating (when the determination in S422 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process and shifts the process to S2 in the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move.

On the other hand, in S422, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RB is not operating (when the determination in S422 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the RB operating time processing based on the bonus operating time table (see FIG. 24). (S423). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets "1" in the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 70), and sets each value of the winning counter and the game counter to predetermined values (respectively). “8”) is set. Then, after the processing of S423, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

Further, when the determination in S421 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the bonus (BB) is a prize (S424). In S424, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus is not a prize (when the determination in S424 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S428 described later.

On the other hand, in S424, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus is a prize (when the determination in S424 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the BB operation process based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 24) (see FIG. 24). S425). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets "1" in the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 70), and sets a predetermined value ("90") in the value of the bonus end number counter. Further, in this process, the main CPU 51 also performs the RB operation process of S423.

Next, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S426). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus start command generation / storage process (S427). In this process, the main CPU 51 generates data of a bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 53. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 109. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started.

Then, after the processing of S427, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

Further, when the determination in S424 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay has won (S428). In S428, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to the re-game has not won (when the determination in S428 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 81). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S428, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to the re-game has won a prize (when the determination in S428 is YES), the main CPU 51 requests the automatic insertion of medals (S429). That is, the main CPU 51 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S429, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 81).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, an interrupt process performed at a cycle of 1.1172 msec under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S431). Next, the main CPU 51 performs an input port check process (S432). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a timer update process (S433). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a process of subtracting a value of a lock timer or the like for each interrupt process, for example.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel control process (S434). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. It drives and controls three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 51 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window portion 4), and then corresponds to the corresponding value. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation of the reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S434, in addition to the above-mentioned normal acceleration process, constant speed process and stop process of the reel, when the pseudo bonus start rotation effect is set at the start of the pseudo bonus, It also controls the reel rotation operation and stop operation in the pseudo-bonus start rotation effect.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a command data transmission process (S435). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits various command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 42.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lamp 7-segment drive process (S436). In this process, the main CPU 51 drives and controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a register reset process (S437). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt process.

As described above, the command data transmission process (S435) during the interrupt process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (data transmission means, main control unit) for transmitting data related to the operation during the game.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 122, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 by using the program will be described. Various tables required for various processes of the sub CPU 81 described below are stored in the sub ROM 82, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas, and the like are provided in the sub RAM 83.

[Main board communication task]
First, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 110.

First, the sub CPU 81 checks the reception of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 (S501). Next, when the sub CPU 81 receives the command, the sub CPU 81 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S503). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S503 that it has not received a command different from the previous one (when the determination in S503 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501.

On the other hand, in S503, when the sub CPU 81 determines that a command different from the previous one has been received (when the determination in S503 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S504). ). The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing after S501.

[Direction registration task]
Next, the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 111.

First, the sub CPU 81 retrieves a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when the determination in S512 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S515 described later.

On the other hand, in S512, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a message in the message queue (when the determination in S512 is YES), the sub CPU 81 copies the game information from the message (S513). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel whose rotation has stopped, a display combination, and a game state flag, which are specified by parameters, are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 83. The reel.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect content determination process (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines the effect content, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the lamp data (S517). It should be noted that these registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S514. After S517, the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S511 and repeats the processes after S511.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect registration task is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (effect control means, sub-control unit) for controlling the execution of the effect corresponding to the received command data. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect content determination process (S514) during the effect registration task is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (effect content determination means) for determining the content of the effect corresponding to the received command data.

[Production content determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, the effect content determination process performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111) will be described. The production data determined (registered) in the following processing is data that specifies animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered in each of the following processes, for example, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and the effect such as displaying an image is executed.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the medal insertion command is received (S521).

In S521, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the medal insertion command has been received (YES in S521), the sub CPU 81 performs the medal insertion command reception processing (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of determining whether or not a demo is being produced. The details of the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of registering the effect data at the time of receiving the medal insertion command (S523). In this process, the sub CPU 81 produces a medal insertion time (bet time) based on information included in the medal insertion command, such as whether or not a medal is inserted, the number of medals inserted, the value of the credit counter, and the processing result of S522. Register (determine) the data. Then, after the processing of S523, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S521, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the medal insertion command is received (when the determination in S521 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the start command is received (S524).

In S524, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the start command is received (YES in S524), the sub CPU 81 performs the start command reception process (S525). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of generating a sub-effect flag, a process of determining whether or not a weight sound is output, and the like. The details of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 115 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of registering the effect data at the time of receiving the start command (S526). In this process, the sub CPU 81 includes, for example, the type of the game state flag, the type of the internal winning combination, the presence / absence and type of the pseudo bonus winning, the presence / absence of the reel lock effect, the value of the effect timer, and the push order navigation included in the start command. The effect data at the start of the game (at the start) is registered (determined) based on the information of the above, the processing result of S525 (type of effect flag, presence / absence of weight sound), and the like. Then, after the processing of S526, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S524, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the start command is received (when the determination in S524 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel rotation start command is received (S527).

In S527, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel rotation start command is received (YES in S527), the sub CPU 81 performs the reel rotation start command reception processing (S528). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers (determines) the effect data of the rotation start sound output, for example, when the reel rotation start command is received. Then, after the processing of S528, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S527, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the reel rotation start command is received (when the determination in S527 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the constant speed start command is received (S529). ..

In S529, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the constant speed start command is received (YES in S529), the sub CPU 81 performs the constant speed start command reception processing (S530). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of setting the lighting mode of the stop button to the effective lighting mode. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the constant speed start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of registering the effect data at the time of receiving the constant speed start command (S531). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers (determines) the effect data corresponding to the effective lighting mode of the stop button set in the process of S530, for example. Then, after the processing of S531, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S529, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the constant speed start command is received (when the determination in S529 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel stop command is received (S532).

In S532, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel stop command has been received (YES in S532), the sub CPU 81 performs the reel stop command reception processing (S533). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of setting the lighting mode of the stop button to the invalid lighting mode. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command will be described later with reference to FIG. 117 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of registering the effect data at the time of receiving the reel stop command (S534). In this process, the sub CPU 81 produces an effect when the reel is stopped, based on information such as the type of the stop reel (operation stop button), the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces, and the processing result of S533, which are included in the reel stop command. Register (determine) the data. Then, after the processing of S534, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S532, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the reel stop command is received (when the determination in S532 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the display command is received (S535).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S535 that it is at the time of receiving the display command (when the determination in S535 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process at the time of receiving the display command (S536). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines and registers the effect number by lottery based on the type of display combination and the like. Here, the effect number is data that specifies the content of the effect to be executed this time. After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S535 that it is not the time when the display command is received (when the determination in S535 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus start command is received (S537).

In S537, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the bonus start command is received (YES in S537), the sub CPU 81 performs the bonus start command reception process (S538). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data for starting the bonus. After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S537, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the bonus start command is received (when the determination in S537 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus end command is received (S539).

In S539, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the time when the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S539 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process when the bonus end command is received (S540). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data for ending the bonus. After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S539, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S539 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the settlement sound command is received (S541).

In S541, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the settlement sound command is being received (when the determination in S541 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the settlement sound command reception processing (S542). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a parameter set process indicating the state during settlement. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the settlement sound command will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later. Then, after the processing of S542, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S541, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the settlement sound command is received (when the determination in S541 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the credit information command is received (S543).

In S543, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the credit information command is being received (when the determination in S543 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the credit information command reception processing (S544). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs output processing of the payout sound, counting process of the number of payouts, output processing of the settlement sound, counting processing of the number of settlements, and the like. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the credit information command will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of registering the effect data at the time of receiving the credit information command (S545). In this process, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the time of receiving the credit information command based on information such as various parameters included in the credit information command and the processing result of S544 (output information of payout sound and settlement sound). decide. Then, after the processing of S545, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S543, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the credit information command is received (when the determination in S543 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the effect instruction command is received (S546).

In S546, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect instruction command is being received (when the determination in S546 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the effect instruction command reception time process (S547). In this process, the sub CPU 81 responds to various triggers in the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotation effect, freeze effect, long weight effect, etc.) based on various information (effect instruction parameters, etc.) included in the effect instruction command. Performs production data set processing. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the effect instruction command will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect data registration process at the time of receiving the effect instruction command (S548). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs a process of registering effect data corresponding to various triggers of the reel effect set in S547. Then, after the processing of S548, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

On the other hand, in S546, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the effect instruction command is received (when the determination in S546 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the no-operation command is received (S549).

In S549, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is at the time of receiving the no-operation command (when the determination of YES in S549), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing at the time of receiving the no-operation command (S550). In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs, for example, a settlement sound output stop process, a stop button invalid lighting mode set process, a demo effect set process, and the like. The details of the non-operation command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of registering the effect data at the time of receiving the no-operation command (S551). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 81 mainly performs the registration process of the effect data set in S550. Then, after the processing of S551, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 111).

[Processing when receiving medal insertion command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the medal insertion command reception processing performed in S522 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number of possible game starts (three in the present embodiment) based on the information on the number of inserted medals included in the medal insertion command (S561). In S561, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of inserted medals is not the number of medals that can start the game (when the determination in S561 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content (the process is (See FIGS. 112 and 113).

On the other hand, in S561, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of medals inserted is the number of medals that can be started in the game (when the determination in S561 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demo flag to the off state (S562). The sub-demo flag is a flag indicating whether or not the sub-demo flag is currently in a non-game state (a state from the end of the payout process to the insertion of medals), and when the sub-demo flag is on, the sub CPU 81 is non-game. Determined to be in a state. The sub-demo flag is set to the ON state in the processing at the time of receiving the credit information command described later (see FIG. 119 described later). Further, the sub demo flag is stored in the sub RAM 83.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is currently in the demo and / or power saving mode (S563). In this determination process, the sub CPU 81 determines that the demo and / or power saving mode is in the state when the demo effect data is currently set.

In S563, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 is not currently in the demo and / or power saving mode (when the determination in S563 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the medal insertion command, and the processing is produced. The process moves to S523 of the determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

On the other hand, in S563, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 is currently in the demo and / or power saving mode (when the determination in S563 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the demo effect end process (S564). By this process, the effect content is switched from the effect in the demo and / or power saving mode state to the effect in the normal state. Then, after the processing of S564, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the medal insertion command, and shifts the processing to S523 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

[Processing when receiving start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the process at the time of receiving the start command performed in S525 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs a sub-effect flag setting (generation) process (S571). In this process, the sub CPU 81 is based on information on the type of internal winning combination (main small winning combination winning number) included in the start command, the presence / absence and type of winning of the pseudo bonus (AT), and the number of stocks of the pseudo BB. With reference to the sub-effect flag list table shown in 78, the corresponding sub-effect flag is generated. Based on the sub-effect flag generated in this process, various effect contents are determined by lottery or the like.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not to perform the reel effect at the start of the unit game (game) this time (S572). In this determination process, the sub CPU 81 is a pseudo-bonus start game (notification game) based on, for example, information on the presence / absence and type of the pseudo-bonus winning, the presence / absence of the reel lock effect, and the like included in the start command. If it is the start game of the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel effect is performed.

In S572, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel effect is not performed (NO in S572), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command, and performs the process in the effect content determination process (FIGS. 112 and 113). (See) to S526.

On the other hand, in S572, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 performs the reel effect (when the determination in S572 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the weight sound generation condition is satisfied (S573). The sub CPU 81 performs this determination process based on the information included in the start command indicating whether or not the wait time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has elapsed. Then, when the weight time (4.1 sec) from the start of the previous game has not elapsed, the sub CPU 81 determines that the weight sound generation condition is satisfied.

In S573, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the weight sound generation condition is not satisfied (NO in S573), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command, and performs the process to determine the effect content (FIG. FIG. Move to S526 (see 112 and FIG. 113).

On the other hand, in S573, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the weight sound generation condition is satisfied (when the determination in S573 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the output of the weight sound (S574). Then, after the processing of S574, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and shifts the processing to S526 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

As described above, the process of setting the output of the weight sound (S574) when the weight sound generation condition is satisfied in the start command reception process S573 of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (weight sound generation control means) for controlling the output of the weight sound when it is determined that the weight time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game. ..

[Processing when receiving constant speed start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the process at the time of receiving the constant speed start command performed in S530 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 sets each stop button valid sub flag of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R to the ON state (S591). Note that each stop button valid flag is a flag indicating whether or not the player's pressing operation on the corresponding stop button is valid, and if each stop button valid flag is in the on state, The player's pressing operation on the corresponding stop button becomes effective. Each of these stop button enable flags is stored in the sub RAM 83.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data in which the lighting mode of all the stop buttons is the effective lighting mode (S592). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for lighting all the stop buttons in blue. Then, after the processing of S592, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the constant speed start command, and shifts the processing to S531 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

[Processing when receiving reel stop command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the reel stop command reception processing performed in S533 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the stopped reel is the left reel 3L (S601).

In S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is not the left reel 3L (when the determination in S601 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S603 described later. On the other hand, in S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is the left reel 3L (when the determination in S601 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the left stop button valid flag to the off state (S602).

After the processing of S602 or when the determination in S601 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the stopped reel is the middle reel 3C (S603).

In S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is not the middle reel 3C (when the determination in S603 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S605 described later. On the other hand, in S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is the middle reel 3C (when the determination in S603 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the middle stop button enable flag to the off state (S604).

After the processing of S604 or when the determination in S603 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the stopped reel is the right reel 3R (S605).

In S605, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is not the right reel 3R (when the determination in S605 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S607 described later. On the other hand, in S605, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is the right reel 3R (when the determination in S605 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the right stop button enable flag to the off state (S606).

After the processing of S606 or when the determination in S605 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data that sets the lighting mode of the stop button corresponding to the stopped reel to the invalid lighting mode (S607). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for lighting the stop button corresponding to the stopped reel in red. Then, after the processing of S607, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and shifts the processing to S534 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

As described above, the control of the lighting mode of the stop button executed in the reel stop command reception processing of the present embodiment and the constant speed start command reception processing described with reference to FIG. 116 is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. To. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (notification control means) for controlling the lighting mode (notification mode) by the lighting lamp of the stop button based on the received command data.

[Processing when receiving settlement sound command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the settlement sound command reception processing performed in S542 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 sets the settlement flag to the ON state (S611). The settlement flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current state is the settlement in-state of the medal, and if the settlement flag is in the settlement in-state, the settlement flag is turned on. The settlement flag is stored in the sub RAM 83.

Then, after the processing of S611, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the settlement sound command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

As described above, the settlement sound command reception processing of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for setting the medal settlement state (payment in progress setting means) when the settlement sound command is received.

[Processing when receiving credit information command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the credit information command reception processing performed in S544 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the settlement flag is in the ON state (S621).

In S621, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the settlement flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S621 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S631 described later. On the other hand, in S621, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the settlement flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S621 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of payouts is "0" based on the information included in the credit information command. It is determined whether or not there is (S622). For example, when the winning combination is not a small winning combination, the information regarding the number of payouts included in the credit information command is "0".

In S622, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of payouts is "0" (when the determination in S622 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the setting process of the sub demo transition timer (S623). In this process, the sub CPU 81 sets a predetermined transition time to the demo and / or power saving mode state in the sub demo transition timer. The demo and / or the predetermined transition time to the power saving mode state set in the sub-demo transition timer can be arbitrarily set in advance, but is set to the same time as the transition time set in the main demo transition timer. Set. Then, the counting process of the sub-demo transition timer (the subtraction process of the timer for counting the demo transition time) is performed by an interrupt process periodically executed by the sub CPU 81 (not shown). Further, the sub-demo transition timer shows a specific example of the second monitoring means according to the present invention.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demo flag to the ON state (S624). Then, after the processing of S624, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the credit information command, and shifts the processing to S545 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

On the other hand, in S622, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of payouts is not "0" (when the determination in S622 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines the number of medals to be paid out (the remaining number of payouts) included in the credit information command. It is set in the payout end counter (S625). The payout end counter is a counter that counts the number of medals to be paid out in one game, and is provided in the sub RAM 83.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the output of the payout sound (S626). By this process, a payout sound is generated every time one medal is paid out. Next, the sub CPU 81 subtracts "1" from the value of the payout end counter (S627).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the payout end counter is “0” (S628).

In S628, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the payout end counter is not "0" (when the determination in S628 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the credit information command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content. Move to S545 (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

On the other hand, in S628, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the payout end counter is "0" (when the determination in S628 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the set processing of the sub demo transition timer (S629). In this process, the same process as the process described in S623 above is performed. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demo flag to the ON state (S630). Then, after the processing of S630, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the credit information command, and shifts the processing to S545 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

Here, returning to the processing of S621 again, if S621 is determined to be YES (when the settlement is in progress), the sub CPU 81 sets the number of medals credits (remaining number of credits) included in the credit information command as the settlement end counter. (S631). The settlement end counter is a counter that counts the number of settlement (payout) medals that have been credited, and is provided in the sub RAM 83.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the output of the settlement sound (S632). By this process, a settlement sound is generated every time one medal is settled (paid out). Next, the sub CPU 81 subtracts "1" from the value of the settlement end counter (S633).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the settlement end counter is "0" (S634).

In S634, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the settlement end counter is not "0" (when the determination in S634 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the credit information command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content. Move to S545 (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

On the other hand, in S634, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the settlement end counter is "0" (when the determination in S634 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the settlement flag to the off state (S635).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a set process of the sub demo transition timer (S636). In this process, the same process as the process described in S623 above is performed. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub demo flag to the ON state (S637). Then, after the processing of S637, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the credit information command, and shifts the processing to S545 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

As described above, the process of subtracting the value of the payout end counter during the process of receiving the credit information command of the present embodiment by "1" (S627) and the process of subtracting the value of the settlement end counter by "1" (S633) are performed. It is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for counting the number of times the credit information command is continuously received at the payout interval of one medal (payout number counting means). Further, the process (S628) of determining whether or not the value of the payout end counter during the process of receiving the credit information command is "0" is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (payout end determination means) for determining whether or not the medal payout process is completed based on the value of the payout end counter. Further, the process (S634) of determining whether or not the value of the settlement end counter during the process of receiving the credit information command is "0" is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (payment end determination means) for determining whether or not the medal settlement process has been completed based on the value of the settlement end counter.

[Processing when receiving production instruction command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the effect processing at the time of receiving the effect instruction command performed in S547 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the start of the reel effect based on the information of the effect instruction parameter included in the effect instruction command (see FIG. 80) (S641).

In S641, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the start of the reel effect (when the determination in S641 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S643 described later. On the other hand, in S641, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the start of the reel effect (when the determination in S641 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for the start of the reel effect. (S642). In this process, the sub CPU 81 changes the effect data for starting the reel effect depending on whether or not a short lock is generated. The details of the set processing of the effect data at the start of the reel effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 described later.

After the processing of S642 or when the determination in S641 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the end of the reel effect (S643).

In S643, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the end of the reel effect (when the determination in S643 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S645 described later. On the other hand, in S643, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the end of the reel effect (when the determination in S643 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for the end of the reel effect. (S644).

After the processing of S644 or when the determination in S643 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the time when the stop button is pseudo-pressed (S645).

In S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the time of the pseudo pressing (when the determination in S645 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S647 described later. On the other hand, in S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the time of pseudo pressing (when the determination of YES in S645), the sub CPU 81 performs the set processing of the effect data for pseudo pressing. (S646). In addition, when controlling the lighting mode of each stop button during the reel effect (pseudo-bonus start rotating cylinder effect) as in the normal case, in this process, for example, the lighting mode of the target reel that is pseudo-pressed The effect data for setting the invalid lighting mode (red lighting) is set.

After the processing of S646 or when the determination in S645 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the pseudo stop of the reel (S647).

In S647, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the pseudo stop (when the determination in S647 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S649 described later. On the other hand, in S647, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the pseudo stop (when the determination in S647 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the set process of the effect data for the pseudo stop. (S648).

After the processing of S648 or when the determination in S647 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the start of the pseudo rotation of the reel (S649).

In S649, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the start of the pseudo rotation (when the determination in S649 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S651 described later. On the other hand, in S649, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the start of the pseudo rotation (when the determination in S649 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for the start of the pseudo rotation. (S650).

After the processing of S650 or when the determination in S649 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the time when the rotation of the reel is restarted (S651).

In S651, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is not the time when the rotation is restarted (when the determination in S651 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the effect instruction command, and performs the process. The process moves to S548 of the determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

On the other hand, in S651, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the state at the time of receiving the effect instruction command is the time when the rotation is restarted (when the determination in S651 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the set process of the effect data for restarting the rotation. (S652). Then, after the processing of S652, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the effect instruction command, and shifts the processing to S548 of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

[Set processing of production data for starting reel production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the set processing of the effect data for starting the reel effect performed in S642 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the effect instruction command (see FIG. 120) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel effect is a short lock generation effect based on the value of the effect instruction parameter included in the effect instruction command (S661).

In S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel effect is a short lock generation effect (when the determination in S661 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a set process of the effect data for starting when a short lock occurs (S662). .. In this process, the sub CPU 81 sets, for example, the output of the rotation start sound. Then, after the process of S662, the sub CPU 81 ends the set process of the effect data for the start of the reel effect, and shifts the process to S643 of the process of receiving the effect instruction command (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel effect is not the short lock occurrence effect (NO determination in S661), the sub CPU 81 performs the effect data set processing for starting when the short lock does not occur (when the short lock does not occur). S663). Then, after the processing of S663, the sub CPU 81 ends the setting processing of the effect data for starting the reel effect, and shifts the processing to S643 of the processing at the time of receiving the effect instruction command (see FIG. 120).

As described above, the control of the set processing of the effect data at the start of the reel effect of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (effect control means) for controlling the execution of the rotation start sound output (specific effect).

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the non-operation command reception processing performed in S550 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is the settlement state, the number of credits is "0", and the settlement sound is being output (S671). In this process, if the settlement flag is on, the value of the settlement end counter is "0", and the output of the settlement sound is set, the sub CPU 81 determines the determination condition of S671. Judge that it is satisfied.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S671 that the determination condition of S671 is not satisfied (when the determination in S671 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S673 described later. On the other hand, in S671, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination condition of S671 is satisfied (when the determination in S671 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the output stop of the settlement sound (S672).

After the processing of S672 or when the determination in S671 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an operation input other than the stop operation based on the information included in the non-operation command (S673).

In S673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no operation input other than the stop operation (when the determination in S673 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S683 described later. On the other hand, in S673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is an operation input other than the stop operation (when the determination in S673 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the left stop button valid flag is in the ON state. (S674).

In S674, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the left stop button valid flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S674 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S677 described later.

On the other hand, in S674, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the left stop button valid flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S674 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the left stop button valid flag to the Off state (S675). .. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for changing the lighting mode of the left stop button 17L to the invalid lighting mode (S676). By this process, the lighting mode of the left stop button 17L changes from blue lighting to red lighting.

After the processing of S676 or when the determination in S674 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the middle stop button valid flag is in the ON state (S677).

In S677, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the middle stop button valid flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S677 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S680 described later.

On the other hand, in S677, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the middle stop button valid flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S677 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the middle stop button valid flag to the off state (S678). .. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for changing the lighting mode of the middle stop button 17C to the invalid lighting mode (S679). By this process, the lighting mode of the middle stop button 17C changes from blue lighting to red lighting.

After the processing of S679 or when the determination in S677 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the right stop button valid flag is in the ON state (S680).

In S680, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the right stop button enable flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S680 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S683 described later.

On the other hand, in S680, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the right stop button valid flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S680 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the right stop button valid flag to the off state (S681). .. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for changing the lighting mode of the right stop button 17R to the invalid lighting mode (S682). By this process, the lighting mode of the right stop button 17R changes from blue lighting to red lighting.

After the processing of S682, or when S673 or S680 determines NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub demo flag is in the ON state (S683). In S683, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub demo flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S683 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the non-operation command reception processing and performs the processing to determine the effect content (FIGS. 112 and FIGS. (Refer to 113), move to S551.

On the other hand, in S683, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub demo flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S683 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub demo transition timer is “0” (S684). ..

In S684, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub demo transition timer is not "0" (when the determination in S684 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the non-operation command reception processing and performs the processing to determine the effect content (FIG. FIG. Move to S551 (see 112 and FIG. 113).

On the other hand, in S684, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub demo transition timer is "0" (when the determination in S684 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the demo effect data (S685). By this process, the effect for the state of the demo and / or the power saving mode (specific effect process for the non-gaming state) is started. Then, after the processing of S685, the sub CPU 81 ends the non-operation command reception processing, and shifts the processing to S551 of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

As described above, in the non-operation command reception processing of the present embodiment, whether or not the current state is the state of settlement, the number of credits is "0", and the settlement sound is being output. The determination process (S671) is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (payment state determination means) for determining whether or not the determination condition of S671 is satisfied. Further, in the non-operation command reception processing, when it is determined that the determination condition of S671 is satisfied, the processing (S672) for setting the output stop of the settlement sound is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the determination condition of S671 is satisfied, the sub-control circuit 42 stops the execution of the effect indicating the settlement operation of the medal (game medium) (payment effect stop). It also serves as a means).

Further, as described above, the process (S684) of determining whether or not the sub-demo transition timer during the process of receiving the non-operation command of the present embodiment is "0" is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, whether or not the sub-control circuit 42 performs a specific effect processing for the demo and / or power saving mode state (non-gaming state) based on the monitoring result by the sub-demo transition timer. It also serves as a means for determining whether or not (second non-gaming state determination means). Further, the process of setting the demo effect data (S685) during the process of receiving the no-operation command is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (non-gaming effect execution means) for performing a specific effect process for the state of the demo and / or the power saving mode.

<Various deformation examples>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention have been described above, including their effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various embodiments and modifications are included as long as the gist of the present invention described in the claims is not deviated. For example, the following various modifications can be considered.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the game period of the pseudo bonus (AT) is managed by the number of games has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the game period of the pseudo bonus (AT) is the total number of medals. It may be managed according to the number of payouts or the difference.

Further, in the above embodiment, a configuration example of a game machine having an AT function has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to, for example, a game machine having a function in which an AT function and an RT function are simultaneously operated, that is, a so-called ART function.

Further, in the present invention, a part or all of the various lottery processes and various control processes performed in the sub control circuit 42 in the above embodiment may be performed in the main control circuit 41. Further, for example, a part or all of various lottery processes and various control processes performed in the main control circuit 41 in the above embodiment may be performed in the sub control circuit 42.

<Summary>
[Long weight production]
Conventionally, in a game machine having an AT function, a game machine that performs an AT lottery according to a combination of symbols displayed as stopped is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-201705). In the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-201705, by performing AT, the player can win a prize without missing the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

As described above, conventionally, a game machine that performs AT lottery according to a combination of symbols displayed as stopped is known. However, since the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped is determined by the internal winning combination, the result of the AT lottery is actually determined by the lottery that determines the internal winning combination in the game machine having such a function. become. Therefore, the player can easily grasp whether or not the AT is performed from the determined internal winning combination, and there is a risk that the operation of the AT will not be interesting.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned first problem, and the first object of the present invention is to change the operation of the AT in a gaming machine having an AT function. It is to provide a technology that can maintain the interest in AT operation.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
A notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a specific period when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
When starting the notification game state, a notification game continuation determination means for determining whether or not to start the game in the notification game state again after the end of the game period of the notification game state, and
A lock execution means for generating a lock that invalidates the game operation by the player for a predetermined period at a predetermined timing in the unit game.
When the notification game continuation determining means determines to start the game in the notification game state again after the end of the game period in the notification game state, the lock execution means determines whether or not to generate the lock. Rock production decision means and
A game machine equipped with.

Further, in the first gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined by the lock effect determining means to generate the lock, after a predetermined weight time from the start of the previous unit game is exhausted. The lock may be generated by the lock executing means.

In addition, the first gaming machine of the present invention further includes an operation related to the progress of the game and a main control unit that controls the operation.
The internal winning combination determination means, the stop control means, the notification game determination means, the notification game continuation determination means, the lock execution means, and the lock effect determination means are included in the main control unit.
The lock effect determining means determines whether or not to generate the lock by the lock executing means in the start unit game of the notified game state, and is a unit within the game period of the notified game state that generates the lock. The game may be decided.

According to the first gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player regarding the AT operation in the gaming machine having the AT function.

[Automatic stop effect of reels with high-speed stop pattern (misalignment)]
Conventionally, a game machine having a function of executing an operation called "lock" that invalidates or delays the game for a certain period of time at a predetermined timing during the game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). See publication). In the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920, a reel action of aligning and pausing seven symbols is executed during the lock period. It is possible to effectively inform the player that the privilege (AT) will be given by the reel action with the seven symbols.

As described above, conventionally, in a game machine having an AT function, there is known a game machine that notifies that an AT has been given by a reel action (reel effect) with seven symbols. However, since the reel action with the seven symbols is a monotonous effect, there is a risk that the player may not find the reel action interesting with this technique.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned second problem, and a second object of the present invention is a player's interest in reel action (reel production) in a gaming machine having a reel action function. Is to provide a technology that can improve.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means that includes a plurality of display columns provided with a plurality of symbols necessary for the game, and circulates and displays the plurality of symbols based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period,
When the transition to the notified game state is determined by the notified game determining means, the game in the notified game state is played during the lock period in which the game operation by the player is invalidated in the start unit game of the notified game state. A display column effect executing means for executing an effect of automatically stopping a combination of specific symbols indicating a start on a predetermined virtual line straddling the plurality of display columns is provided.
The display column effect executing means is arranged on the preparation line in the linear direction in which the combination of the specific symbols intersects the predetermined virtual line before the automatic stop of the combination of the specific symbols, and the combination of the specific symbols is arranged. A ready state is generated in which adjacent symbols are arranged so as to be offset by one symbol among a plurality of symbols constituting the combination, and then the plurality of display columns are automatically stopped in a predetermined order and the combination of the specific symbols. A gaming machine characterized by stopping on the predetermined virtual line.

Further, in the second gaming machine of the present invention, in the display row effect executing means, in the prepared state, among the plurality of symbols constituting the combination of the specific symbols, the symbols other than the predetermined symbol are prepared. At the timing when the display column including the predetermined symbol stops on the line and the display column is in the variable display is generated, and the predetermined symbol included in the display column in the variable display reaches the preparation line. , The display column including the stopped symbol is displayed in a variable manner again, and then the plurality of display columns are automatically stopped in a predetermined order, and the combination of the specific symbols is stopped on the predetermined virtual line. You may.

In addition, the second gaming machine of the present invention further includes an operation related to the progress of the game and a main control unit that controls the operation.
The internal winning combination determination means, the stop control means, the notification game determination means, and the display sequence effect execution means are included in the main control unit.
A plurality of types of combinations of the specific symbols are provided.
The preparation state may be different depending on the type of the combination of the specific symbols.

According to the second gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, in a gaming machine having a reel action function, it is possible to improve the player's interest in reel action (reel production).

[Pseudo-bonus start rotation production]
Conventionally, it is a combination (bonus combination) in which a special game is started by a stop display of a special combination of symbols, and when the combination is internally won, the winning state is carried over until a special combination of symbols is displayed. A gaming machine provided with (so-called carry-over combination) is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). In the gaming machine of JP-A-2011-254920, since the special combination is carried over until the special combination of symbols is displayed, it is not possible to display the special combination of symbols in the unit game in which the special combination is won. Even in this case, after the next unit game, the opportunity to display the special combination of symbols is given again. In this case, there is no risk of losing the opportunity to start a special game, and even a player with poor skill can play the game with peace of mind.

As described above, conventionally, a game machine provided with a carry-over role is known. However, in such a game machine, if the combination of special symbols cannot be stopped and displayed over the period of a plurality of unit games (games), the player may feel uncomfortable. In addition, there were some players who did not like being informed to others that they could not display a special combination of symbols.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned third problem, and a third object of the present invention is to start a special game regardless of skill without causing discomfort to the player. Is to provide a game machine capable of.

In order to solve the above-mentioned third problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means that includes a plurality of display columns provided with a plurality of symbols necessary for the game, and circulates and displays the plurality of symbols based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period,
When the transition to the notified game state is determined by the notified game determining means, the game operation by the player is invalid after the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means in the start unit game of the notified game state. A display column effect executing means for executing an effect of automatically stopping a combination of specific symbols indicating the start of the game in the notified game state on a predetermined virtual line straddling the plurality of display rows during the locked period. ,
When the notification game determination means determines the transition to the notification game state, the notification means for notifying that the transition to the notification game state has been determined is provided.
The display column effect executing means is
An elapsed time determining means for determining whether or not a preset specific time has elapsed since the start operation was detected by the start operation detecting means.
It has a symbol automatic stop means for starting an operation of automatically stopping the combination of the specific symbols on the predetermined virtual line when the elapsed time determination means determines that the specific time has elapsed. ,
A gaming machine characterized in that the notification by the notification means is performed at a predetermined timing within the specific time.

Notification game state (pseudo-bonus state) start unit After the game start operation is detected, the reel rotation start operation is performed, and a specific symbol combination (“REG alignment”, “BIG alignment”) is placed on a predetermined virtual line. The time until the game is stopped is not constant because it usually depends on the position of the symbol that has been stopped and displayed before the start unit game of the notified game state. That is, the period during which the notification by the notification means can be executed (time for notification production) depends on the position of the symbol that has been stopped and displayed before the start unit game of the notification game state. However, in the above-mentioned third game machine, as described above, the period from the detection of the start operation to the start of the operation of automatically stopping the combination of the specific symbols on the predetermined virtual line is set to the specific time (notification wait time). ), And the notification is made by the notification means within this specific time. Therefore, according to the third gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to secure the notification effect time that does not depend on the position of the symbol that has been stopped and displayed before the start unit game of the notification gaming state.

Further, in the third gaming machine of the present invention, after it is determined by the elapsed time determining means that the specific time has elapsed, and after the variation display of the plurality of display columns is executed for one round, the said. The symbol automatic stop means may start the automatic stop operation of the specific combination of symbols.

In addition, the third gaming machine of the present invention further includes an operation related to the progress of the game and a main control unit that controls the operation.
The internal winning combination determination means, the stop control means, the notification game determination means, and the display sequence effect execution means are included in the main control unit.
The notification by the notification means may be performed after the predetermined weight time from the start of the previous unit game has been exhausted in the start unit game of the notification game state.

According to the third gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of starting a special game regardless of skill.

Further, in order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period,
When the notification game determination means determines the transition to the notification game state, the notification means for notifying that the transition to the notification game state has been determined is provided.
When the transition to the notified game state is determined by the notified game determining means, the start unit game of the notified game state is after the predetermined weight time from the start of the previous unit game has been exhausted, and the player A gaming machine characterized in that a notification is made by the notification means before the variable display of the plurality of display columns is started during the lock period in which the game operation by the player is invalidated.

In the fourth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is determined to shift to the notified gaming state (pseudo-bonus state) when a predetermined weight time (4.1 sec) has elapsed since the start of the previous unit game. This is notified by the notification means, and then the variable display (reel rotation) operation of the display column is started. Therefore, in the fourth game machine, even if the variation display operation pattern (reverse rotation, etc.) of the display column at the start of the notification game state is increased, the notification game state is finally reached after the variation display of the display column starts. It becomes difficult for the player to recognize that a specific combination of symbols (“REG alignment”, “BIG alignment”) indicating the transition to is automatically stopped (stopped while locked) by the effect. In addition, as in the normal game (when the lock does not occur), the variable display operation of the display column starts after the lapse of the wait time since the start of the previous unit game, so that the presence or absence of the lock is immediately determined. Can be prevented. Based on these facts, according to the fourth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the effect of notifying that the transition to the notification game state has been decided (the effect of lighting the notification lamp) is made more effective. be able to.

Further, in the fourth gaming machine of the present invention, when the transition to the notification game state is determined by the notification game determination means, in the start unit game of the notification game state, during the lock period, After the notification by the notification means is performed, the variable display of the plurality of display columns is started, and then a combination of specific symbols indicating the start of the game in the notified game state is formed over the plurality of display columns. A display column effect executing means for executing an effect that automatically stops on the virtual line may be provided.

Further, the fourth gaming machine of the present invention further includes an operation related to the progress of the game and a main control unit that controls the operation.
The internal winning combination determination means, the stop control means, the notification game determination means, and the display sequence effect execution means are included in the main control unit.
The display column effect executing means is
After the combination of the specific symbols is automatically stopped on the predetermined virtual line, the notification start lock effect executing means may be provided to generate a lock for which the game operation by the player is invalidated for a specific period.

Also in the fourth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of starting a special game regardless of skill.

[Weight sound generation function]
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that generates a state called "lock" that invalidates or delays a gaming operation by a player at a predetermined timing during a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-254920 proposes a gaming machine having an effect function of rotating and stopping a reel during locking to perform a reel action. In such a game machine, since it is possible to perform an effect using a reel during locking, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

As described above, conventionally, a game machine having a function of performing a reel effect during locking is known. However, since the game motion during locking is not an actual game motion but a pseudo game motion, when the player recognizes that the game is locked, the player's interest in such an effect diminishes. I was afraid.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned fourth problem, and a fourth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that makes it difficult for a player to recognize that the player is locked. ..

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period,
When the transition to the notified game state is determined by the notified game determining means, the game in the notified game state is played during the lock period in which the game operation by the player is invalidated in the start unit game of the notified game state. An effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect indicating the start, and
Equipped with an audio output means for outputting a predetermined audio,
In a game in which the predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means, if the predetermined weight time has not elapsed since the start of the previous unit game, the predetermined weight time has elapsed by the sound output means. A gaming machine characterized in that a weight sound indicating that the game is not output is output, and the weight sound is not output when the predetermined weight time has elapsed since the start of the previous unit game.

Further, in the fifth game machine of the present invention, further
A weight executing means for determining whether or not the predetermined weight time has elapsed, and not starting the variable display of the plurality of display columns when the predetermined weight time has not elapsed.
When it is determined by the weight executing means that the predetermined weight time has not elapsed, the weight sound generation controlling means for controlling the output of the weight sound may be provided.

Further, in the fifth gaming machine of the present invention, when the transition to the notified game state is determined by the notified game determining means, in the start unit game of the notified game state, the predetermined predetermined during the lock period. The effect of automatically stopping a combination of specific symbols indicating the start of the game in the notified game state on a predetermined virtual line straddling the plurality of display rows is executed by the effect executing means, and then the game state is changed. The state may be changed to the notification game state.

According to the fifth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the player is locked.

[Control function for lighting mode of stop button]
The gaming machine generally includes, for example, a main control unit that controls reel operation control processing, internal lottery processing, and the like, and a sub control unit that controls, for example, the above-mentioned AT. Conventionally, there is known a game machine that performs AT lottery in the sub-control unit based on a command transmitted from the main control unit to the sub-control unit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). In a gaming machine having such a configuration, the processing load of the control unit can be distributed.

As described above, conventionally, there is known a game machine in which an auxiliary control unit performs an AT lottery based on a received command. However, since the AT is a function that affects the ball ejection performance of the game machine, it has been required to be controlled by the main control unit.

Normally, a game machine is inspected to see if it is appropriate to install the game machine in the game hall, but the capacity of the main control unit is adjusted for the convenience of efficiency of this inspection. , There were certain restrictions. Therefore, due to the limitation of the capacity of the main control unit, various functions that are preferably controlled by the main control unit such as the AT described above have been mounted on the peripheral board such as the sub control unit.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned fifth problem, and a fifth object of the present invention is to reduce the amount of processing and the amount of data in the main control unit and to control by the main control unit such as AT. Is to provide a gaming machine that enables the main control unit to execute various preferable functions.

In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification device that notifies the validity or invalidity of the stop operation by the player,
A data transmission means for transmitting data related to movements during a game, and
A notification control means that receives data transmitted from the data transmission means and controls a notification mode by the notification device based on the received data.
When the notification control means receives data indicating that the speed of the fluctuation display of the display column has reached a predetermined speed, the notification mode of the notification control device is effectively a stop operation by the player. Controlled so as to be the first notification mode indicating that
When the notification control means receives data indicating that the stop operation by the player has been performed, the notification control means indicates that the notification mode by the notification device is invalid for the stop operation by the player. A gaming machine characterized in that it is controlled so as to have the notification mode of 2.

Further, in the sixth game machine of the present invention, when the notification control means receives data corresponding to a predetermined operation other than the stop operation by the player while the stop operation by the player is effective. The notification control means may control the notification mode by the notification device to be the second notification mode.

Further, in the sixth gaming machine of the present invention, further
During the lock period in which the game operation by the player is invalidated, the display column effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect including a plurality of types of pseudo operations by the plurality of display rows,
A pseudo notification control means that receives data transmitted from the data transmission means and controls a notification mode by the notification device based on the received data during execution of the predetermined effect.
During the execution period of the predetermined effect, the data transmission means transmits data indicating the execution of the pseudo operation for each of the pseudo operations.
When the pseudo notification control means receives data indicating that the rotation speed of the variation display of the display column has reached a specific speed during the execution period of the predetermined effect, the pseudo notification control means performs the notification. The notification mode by the device is controlled to be the first notification mode.
When the pseudo notification control means receives data indicating that a pseudo stop operation has been performed on the display column being displayed in a variable manner during the execution period of the predetermined effect, the pseudo notification control means , The notification mode by the notification device may be controlled to be the second notification mode.

According to the sixth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing and the amount of data in the main control unit, and the main control unit executes various functions that are preferably controlled by the main control unit such as AT. Can be made possible.

[Mode of rotation start sound when short lock occurs]
The gaming machine generally includes, for example, a main control unit that controls reel operation control processing, internal lottery processing, and the like, and a sub control unit that mainly performs production control processing. Conventionally, there is known a game machine in which the sub-control unit performs production control based on a command transmitted from the main control unit to the sub-control unit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). In a game machine having such a configuration, a predetermined effect can be executed according to various triggers of the game operation controlled by the main control unit.

As described above, conventionally, a game machine capable of executing a predetermined effect according to various triggers of a game operation is known. Further, in recent years, a game machine that produces an effect (rotation start sound) with the start of rotation of the reel is known. Then, in this technical field, there has been a demand for the development of a game machine capable of executing a new production using this production.

The present invention has been made in order to meet the above-mentioned sixth problem, and a sixth object of the present invention is a game capable of performing a new effect using the effect at the start of rotation accompanying the start of reel rotation. To provide an opportunity.

In order to solve the sixth problem, the present invention provides a seventh game machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a notification game determining means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period,
A lock effect execution means capable of executing an effect of generating a lock that invalidates the game operation by the player for a predetermined period at a predetermined timing in the unit game.
A variable start effect executing means that performs a specific effect indicating the start of the variable display at the start of the variable display of the plurality of display columns.
A data transmission means for transmitting data related to movements during a game, and
A production control means that receives data transmitted from the data transmission means and controls the execution of the specific effect by the effect execution means at the start of fluctuation based on the received data.
In a game in which an effect of generating a specific lock by the lock effect executing means is not generated, after a predetermined weight time from the start of the previous unit game is exhausted, the effect control means displays the variation of the display column. Upon receiving the data indicating the start, the variable start effect executing means executes the specific effect,
In a game in which the effect of generating the specific lock by the lock effect executing means is performed after the predetermined weight time from the start of the previous unit game is exhausted, the effect control means starts the specific lock. When the data indicating the above is received, the variable start effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed.

Further, in the seventh gaming machine of the present invention, the specific effect is an effect of generating a sound indicating the start of the variable display at the start of the variable display of the plurality of display columns.
Even if the execution timing of the specific effect in the game in which the effect of generating the specific lock is performed is the same as the execution timing of the specific effect in the game in which the effect of generating the specific lock does not occur. Good.

According to the seventh gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to perform a new effect using the effect at the start of rotation accompanying the start of reel rotation.

[Production and transmission function of production instruction command]
Conventionally, there is known a game machine that generates a state called "lock" that invalidates or delays a game operation by a player at a predetermined timing during a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-254920 proposes a gaming machine having an effect function of rotating and stopping a reel during locking to perform a reel action. In such a game machine, since it is possible to perform an effect using a reel while locked, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

As described above, conventionally, a game machine having a function of performing a reel effect during locking is known. In general, the gaming machine includes, for example, a main control unit that controls reel operation control processing, internal lottery processing, and the like, and a sub control unit that mainly performs production control processing. The reel effect is usually controlled by the main control unit. That is, the reel operation control in the reel effect is performed by the main control unit, and for example, other effects using the liquid crystal display device or the like are performed by the sub control unit. However, in such a configuration, there is a problem that even if other effects are executed in correspondence with the operation of the reel in the reel effect, a gap occurs between the two effects.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned seventh problem, and a seventh object of the present invention is a reel operation during reel production controlled by a main control unit and controlled by a sub control unit. It is to provide a game machine capable of further suppressing the deviation from the reel production.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the present invention provides an eighth game machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
During the lock period in which the game operation by the player is invalidated, the display column effect executing means capable of executing the effect including a plurality of types of pseudo actions by the plurality of display columns, and the display column effect executing means.
A data transmission means for transmitting data related to movements during a game, and
The effect control means for receiving the data transmitted from the data transmission means and controlling the execution of the effect corresponding to the received data is provided.
During the execution period of the effect by the display column effect executing means, the data transmitting means transmits data indicating the execution of the pseudo operation for each pseudo operation. ..

Further, in order to solve the seventh problem, the present invention provides a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
During the lock period in which the game operation by the player is invalidated, the display column effect executing means capable of executing the effect including the execution operation of the pseudo stop operation for the display column during the pseudo variable display, and the display column effect executing means.
A data transmission means for transmitting data related to movements during a game, and
The effect control means for receiving the data transmitted from the data transmission means and controlling the execution of the effect corresponding to the received data is provided.
During the execution period of the effect by the display column effect executing means, when the pseudo stop operation is executed, the data transmitting means transmits data indicating that the pseudo stop operation has been performed. A featured game machine.

Further, in the eighth and ninth game machines of the present invention, further
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
A notification game determination means capable of determining a transition to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed is provided for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
When the transition to the notified game state is determined by the notified game determining means, the effect by the display column effect executing means may be executed in the start unit game of the notified game state.

According to the eighth and ninth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to further suppress the deviation between the reel operation during the reel effect controlled by the main control unit and the effect controlled by the sub control unit. it can.

[Sub-effect flag generation function]
Conventionally, a game machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") has been developed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920). reference).

By providing the AT function as in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-254920, the player can be expected to increase the number of balls to be played by factors other than the bonus, so that the range of the game can be increased. It can be expanded and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

By the way, in the conventional game machine, the production is performed by the production device (for example, the liquid crystal display device) according to the internal winning combination, but further, when the production is performed according to the success or failure of the AT, the parameter referred to in the production determination is performed. There were problems such as complicated processing and an increase in the amount of data.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned eighth problem, and the eighth object of the present invention is to simplify the configuration (processing content, data amount, etc.) of the effect determination including the validity of AT. It is to provide a game machine that can be realized by the configuration.

In order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a notification game determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period, and
A data transmission means for transmitting data indicating a determination result by the internal winning combination determining means and data indicating a determination result by the notification game determining means, and
It is provided with an effect content determining means for receiving data transmitted from the data transmitting means and determining the content of the effect based on the received data.
The effect content determining means is based on the data indicating the determination result by the internal winning combination determining means received from the data transmitting means and the data indicating the determination result by the notification game determining means, and the type of the internal winning combination. A gaming machine characterized in that an effect parameter is generated by combining the presence / absence of transition to the notification game state and the content of the effect is determined based on the effect parameter.

Further, in the tenth game machine of the present invention, when the transition to the notified game state is determined by the notified game determining means, the game operation by the player is invalidated in the start unit game of the notified game state. During the lock period, the combination of the specific symbols indicating the start of the game in the notified game state is automatically stopped on a predetermined virtual line straddling the plurality of display columns, and then the game state is changed to the above-mentioned. It may shift to the notification game state.

According to the tenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration (processing content, data amount, etc.) for determining the effect including whether or not the AT is correct with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a notification game determining means capable of determining whether or not to shift to a notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period and stocking the privilege of shifting to the notification game state,
A data transmission means for transmitting data indicating a determination result by the internal winning combination determining means and data indicating a determination result by the notification game determining means, and
It is provided with an effect content determining means for receiving data transmitted from the data transmitting means and determining the content of the effect based on the received data.
The effect content determining means is based on the data indicating the determination result by the internal winning combination determining means received from the data transmitting means and the data indicating the determination result by the notification game determining means, and the type of the internal winning combination. And the presence / absence of the transition to the notification game state are combined to generate an effect parameter, and the content of the effect is determined based on the effect parameter.
The effect content determining means determines whether or not there is a shift to the notified gaming state in the current unit game based on the difference between the stock number of the privilege in the current unit game and the stock number of the privilege in the previous unit game. A game machine characterized by making judgments.

Further, in order to solve the eighth problem, the present invention provides a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information that gives a player an advantageous state,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not there is a decision to shift to the notification game state in which notification by the notification means can be executed for a predetermined period, and a notification game determination that can stock the privilege of determining the transition to the notification game state. Means and
A data transmission means for transmitting data indicating a determination result by the internal winning combination determining means and data indicating a determination result by the notification game determining means, and
It is provided with an effect content determining means for receiving data transmitted from the data transmitting means and determining the content of the effect based on the received data.
The effect content determining means is based on the data indicating the determination result by the internal winning combination determining means received from the data transmitting means and the data indicating the determination result by the notification game determining means, and the type of the internal winning combination. And the presence / absence of the determination of the transition to the notification game state are combined to generate an effect parameter, and the content of the effect is determined based on the effect parameter.
The effect content determining means determines the transition to the notified game state in the current unit game based on the difference between the stock number of the privilege in the current unit game and the stock number of the privilege in the previous unit game. A game machine characterized by determining the presence or absence.

Further, in the eleventh and twelfth gaming machines of the present invention, when the transition to the notified gaming state is determined, the lock in which the gaming operation by the player is invalidated in the start unit game of the notified gaming state. During the period, an effect of automatically stopping a combination of specific symbols indicating the start of the game in the notified game state on a predetermined virtual line straddling the plurality of display rows is executed, and then the game state is changed to the notified game state. You may want to move to.

According to the eleventh and twelfth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration (processing content, data amount, etc.) for determining the effect including whether or not the AT is correct with a simple configuration.

[Demo migration management function]
Conventionally, a gaming machine having a function of generating a demo state when a non-gaming state (a state from the end of payout processing to detection of operation of the start lever) elapses for a certain period of time has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-150921). See publication). According to such a game machine, a demonstration (a game promotion image or the like) can be executed on the game machine that is supposed to be on standby, which can be useful for the operation of the game machine. Further, in such a game machine, by monitoring the non-game state, it is possible to set the power saving mode without performing the demonstration or at the same time as the demonstration according to the production state or the setting of the game store. ..

As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine that generates a demo state in a non-gaming state is known. In general, the gaming machine includes, for example, a main control unit that controls reel operation control processing, internal lottery processing, and the like, and a sub-control unit that mainly performs production control processing. / Or, in order to activate the power saving mode function, it is necessary to send a command (demo command) indicating that a certain period of time has passed in the non-gaming state from the main control unit to the sub control unit. In this case, problems such as an increase in command types and an increase in processing load in the main control unit occur.

The present invention has been made to solve the ninth problem, and a ninth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of monitoring a non-gaming state without using a demo command. Is to provide.

In order to solve the ninth problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A main control unit that controls game movements and transmits data related to movements during the game,
A sub-control unit that receives data transmitted from the main control unit and controls an effect operation based on the received data.
The main control unit
The first monitoring means to monitor the non-gaming state,
It has a first non-gaming state determining means for determining whether or not to perform a specific process for a non-gaming state based on the monitoring result by the first monitoring means.
The sub-control unit
A second monitoring means to monitor the non-gaming state,
Based on the monitoring result by the second monitoring means, the second non-gaming state determining means for determining whether or not to perform a specific effect processing for the non-gaming state, and
When the second non-gaming state determining means determines that the specific effect processing for the non-gaming state is to be performed, the non-gaming effect executing means for performing the specific effect processing for the non-gaming state. A game machine characterized by having.

Further, in the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention, the specific effect processing may be started at the same time as the specific processing.

According to the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the non-gaming state can be monitored without using a demo command.

[Count function for the number of medals paid out]
Conventionally, there is known a game machine having a function of performing an effect (output of a payout sound) indicating that a medal is being paid out (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223529). According to such a game machine, it is possible to effectively produce a privilege (medal payout) obtained as a result of the game.

As described above, conventionally, a game machine that performs an effect indicating that while paying out medals is known. In general, a game machine includes, for example, a main control unit that controls reel operation control processing, internal lottery processing, and the like, and a sub-control unit that mainly performs production control processing. In order to end the production of time, it is necessary to send a command (payout end command) indicating that the medal payout has been completed from the main control unit to the sub control unit. In this case, problems such as an increase in command types and an increase in processing load in the main control unit occur.

The present invention has been made to solve the tenth problem, and the tenth object of the present invention is to produce an effect indicating that a medal is being paid out without using a payout end command. It is to provide a game machine capable of.

In order to solve the tenth problem, the present invention provides a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
When the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination related to the payout of the game medium is stopped on the determination line straddling the plurality of display rows by the internal winning combination means, the number of games to be paid out corresponding to the predetermined combination. Game media payout means to pay out media,
Data transmission means for transmitting payout execution data indicating that one game medium has been paid out each time one game medium is paid out by the game medium payout means.
A payout number counting means that receives the payout execution data transmitted from the data transmission means and counts the number of times the payout execution data is received.
A gaming machine comprising a payout end determination means for determining whether or not a payout number of game media corresponding to the predetermined combination has been paid out based on a counting result by the payout number counting means.

Further, in the 14th gaming machine of the present invention, further
A main control unit that controls game movements and transmits data related to movements during the game,
A sub-control unit that receives data transmitted from the main control unit and controls an effect operation based on the received data.
When it is determined by the payout end determination means that the number of game media to be paid out corresponding to the predetermined combination has not been paid out, the payout time effect executing means for performing an effect indicating the payout operation of the game media is provided. You may do so.

Further, in the fourteenth game machine of the present invention, the effect by the payout effect executing means may be an effect of generating a sound indicating the payout operation of the game medium.

According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the medal is being paid out without using the payout end command.

[Medal settlement function]
Conventionally, there is known a game machine having a function of performing an effect (output of a settlement sound) indicating that the medal is being settled during the settlement of medals (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-034438). According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform an effective effect when the medals obtained as a result of the game are settled.

As described above, conventionally, a game machine that performs an effect indicating that during the settlement of medals is known. In general, the gaming machine includes, for example, a main control unit that controls reel operation control processing, internal lottery processing, and the like, and a sub control unit that mainly performs production control processing, but at the time of medal settlement described above. In order to end the production of the above, it is necessary to send a command (payout end command) indicating that the medal payout (payment) has been completed from the main control unit to the sub control unit. In this case, problems such as an increase in command types and an increase in processing load in the main control unit occur.

The present invention has been made to solve the eleventh problem, and the eleventh object of the present invention is to produce an effect indicating that the medal is being settled without using the payout end command. It is to provide a game machine capable of.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, the present invention provides a fifteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A game medium storage means for storing surplus game media,
A settlement operation detection means for detecting the presence or absence of a settlement operation of the stored game medium by the player, and
When the settlement operation detecting means detects a settlement operation, the game medium payout means for paying out the stored game media one by one, and
When the settlement operation of the game medium is detected by the settlement operation detecting means, the settlement start data indicating the settlement start of the game medium is transmitted, and each time one game medium is paid out by the game medium payout means, one piece is sent. Data transmission means for transmitting payout execution data indicating that the game medium of
When the settlement start data transmitted from the data transmission means is received, the settlement in progress setting means for setting the settlement in progress state of the game medium and the settlement in progress setting means.
A payout number counting means that receives the payout execution data transmitted from the data transmission means and counts the number of times the payout execution data is received.
Based on the counting result by the payout number counting means, the settlement end determination means for determining whether or not all the stored game media have been paid out, and
When the settlement in progress state of the game medium is set and it is determined by the settlement end determination means that all the stored game media have not been paid out, the settlement operation of the game medium is shown. A game machine equipped with a means for executing a production at the time of settlement to perform a production.

Further, in the fifteenth game machine of the present invention, further
A main control unit that controls game movements and transmits data related to movements during the game,
A sub-control unit that receives data transmitted from the main control unit and controls the effect operation based on the received data, and the effect by the effect execution means at the time of settlement performs the settlement operation of the game medium. It may be an effect of generating the indicated sound.

Further, in the fifteenth game machine of the present invention, further
A state in which the settlement state of the game medium is set, a state in which an effect indicating the settlement operation of the game medium is being executed, and a state in which all the stored game media are paid out. The settlement state determination means for determining whether or not the condition of is satisfied, and
When it is determined by the settlement state determining means that the condition is satisfied, the settlement effect stopping means for stopping the execution of the effect indicating the settlement operation of the game medium may be provided.

According to the fifteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the medal is being settled without using the payout end command.

1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Display window, 10 ... Front panel, 11 ... Display device, 17L ... left stop button, 17C ... middle stop button, 17R ... right stop button, 18S ... external terminal board, 21 ... lamp group, 20L, 20R ... speaker, 31 ... main control board, 32 ... sub control board, 41 ... main control circuit, 42 ... sub control circuit, 51 ... main CPU, 52 ... main ROM, 53 ... main RAM, 81 ... sub CPU

Claims (2)

A start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by a player,
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A notification device that notifies the player of the validity or invalidity of the stop operation of the variation display of the symbol, and
The means of sending commands and
A notification control means that receives a command transmitted from the transmission means and controls a notification mode by the notification device based on the received command.
When the notification control means receives the first command transmitted when the stop operation becomes effective, the notification control means changes the notification mode by the notification device to the first notification mode indicating that the stop operation is effective. ,
When the notification control means receives a second command transmitted when the stop operation is performed and the stop operation becomes invalid, the notification mode indicates that the stop operation is invalid. Change to mode,
The notification control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, under the conditions of the first notification mode, when there is the start operation by the player, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. A variable display means that is composed of a plurality of display columns and displays a symbol required for a game in a variable manner.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
A notification device provided corresponding to the stop operation detection means and
A data transmission means for transmitting data related to movements during a game, and
A notification control means that receives data transmitted from the data transmission means and controls a notification mode by the notification device based on the received data.
When the notification control means receives data indicating that the speed of the variable display of the display column has reached a predetermined speed during the lock period in which the game operation by the player is invalidated, the notification control means. The means controls so that the notification mode by the notification device becomes the first notification mode indicating that the stop operation during the lock period is effective.
When the notification control means receives data indicating that the stop operation has been performed during the lock period, the notification control means stops the notification mode by the notification device during the lock period. Controlled to be the second notification mode indicating that the operation is invalid,
During the lock period, when the stop operation during the lock period is valid and the notification control means receives data corresponding to a predetermined operation other than the stop operation, the notification is performed. The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the notification mode by the notification device is controlled to be the second notification mode.

Images